6-K 1 d891148d6k.htm FORM 6-K

FORM 6-K

UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

FORM 6-K

REPORT OF FOREIGN ISSUER

PURSUANT TO RULE 13a-16 OR 15d-16

UNDER THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the month of March, 2015

Commission file number: 1-10110

BANCO BILBAO VIZCAYA ARGENTARIA, S.A.

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

BANK BILBAO VIZCAYA ARGENTARIA, S.A.

(Translation of Registrant’s name into English)

Paseo de la Castellana, 81

28046 Madrid

Spain

(Address of principal executive offices)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant files or will file annual reports under cover of Form 20-F or Form 40-F:

Form 20-F  x            Form 40-F  ¨

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(1):

Yes  ¨            No  x

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is submitting the Form 6-K in paper as permitted by Regulation S-T Rule 101(b)(7):

Yes  ¨            No  x

  “Information of Prudential Relevance”   Basel Accord Pillar III   2014

Contents

Contents								1
Glossary								6
Correspondence between the sections of Pillar III and the Group’s Annual Consolidated Accounts as of 31-Dec-2014								9
Index of tables								10
Index of charts								12
Executive Summary								13
Introduction								15
		Regulatory environment in 2014						15
				Legal changes in the Community area				15
				Legal changes at international level				19
1.		General informational requirements						21
		1.1.		Company name and differences in the consolidable group for the purposes of the Solvency Regulations and the Accounting Circular				21
				1.1.1.		Corporate name and scope of application		21
				1.1.2.		Differences in the consolidable group for the purposes of the Solvency Regulations and the Accounting Circular		21
				1.1.3.		Reconciliation of the Public Balance Sheet from the accounting perimeter to the regulatory perimeter		23
				1.1.4.		Main changes in the Group’s scope of consolidation in 2014		24
				1.1.4.1.		Agreement for the acquisition of an additional 14.9% in Garanti		24
				1.1.4.2.		Award of Catalunya Banc		25
				1.1.4.3.		Agreement for the partial sale of CNCB		25
				1.1.4.4.		Agreement for the sale of the stake in Citic International Financial Holdings Limited (CIFH)		26
		1.2.		Identification of dependent institutions with capital below the minimum requirement. Possible impediments for transferring capital				26
		1.3.		Exemptions from capital requirements at the individual or sub-consolidated level				26
		1.4.		General risk control and management model				26
				1.4.1.		Governance and organization		27
				1.4.1.1.		Corporate governance layout		27
				1.4.1.2.		Organizational and committee structure		28
				1.4.1.3.		Internal Risk Control and Internal Validation		30
				1.4.2.		Risk Appetite		30
				1.4.2.1.		Basic Metrics		32
				1.4.2.2.		Limits		32
				1.4.3.		Decisions and processes		33
				1.4.3.1.		A uniform body of regulations		33
				1.4.3.2.		Risk planning		33
				1.4.3.3.		Day-to-day risk management		34
				1.4.4.		Evaluation, monitoring and reporting		34
				1.4.5.		Infrastructure		35
				1.4.6.		Risk culture		36

Page 1

		1.5.		Scope and nature of the risk measurement and reporting systems				36
				1.5.1.		Credit risk		37
				1.5.2.		Market risk		38
				1.5.3.		Operational risk		39
				1.5.4.		Structural risks		39
				1.5.4.1.		Structural interest rate risk		39
				1.5.4.2.		Structural exchange rate risk		40
				1.5.4.3.		Structural risk in the equity portfolio		42
				1.5.5.		Liquidity risk		43
		1.6.		Risk protection and reduction policies. Supervision strategies and processes				44
2.		Information on total eligible capital						46
		2.1.		Characteristics of the eligible capital				46
		2.2		Amount of capital				50
3.		Information on capital requirements						53
		3.1.		A breakdown of minimum capital requirements by risk type				53
		3.2.		Procedure used in the internal capital adequacy assessment process				56
4.		Credit risk						58
		4.1.		Definitions and accounting methodologies				59
				4.1.1.		Definitions of non-performing assets and impaired positions		59
				4.1.2.		Methods for determining value adjustments for impairment of assets and provisions		59
				4.1.2.1.		Impairment losses determined individually		60
				4.1.2.2.		Impairment losses determined collectively		60
				4.1.2.3.		Methods used for provisioning for contingent exposures and commitments		61
				4.1.3.		Criteria for removing or maintaining assets subject to securitization on the balance sheet		61
				4.1.4.		Criteria for the recognition of earnings in the event of the removal of assets from the balance sheet		62
				4.1.5.		Key hypothesis for valuing risks and benefits retained on securitized assets		62
		4.2.		Information on credit risks				63
				4.2.1.		Exposure to credit risk		63
				4.2.2.		Average value of the exposures throughout 2014 and 2013		64
				4.2.3.		Distribution by geographical area		65
				4.2.4.		Distribution by sector		68
				4.2.5.		Distribution by residual maturity		69
				4.2.6.		Value adjustments for impairment losses and allowances for contingent risks and commitments		71
				4.2.7.		Total impairment losses for the period		71
		4.3.		Information on counterparty risk				72
				4.3.1.		Policies on managing counterparty risk		72
				4.3.1.1.		Methodology: allocation of internal capital and limits to exposures subject to counterparty risk		72
				4.3.1.2.		Policies for ensuring the effectiveness of collaterals and establishing the value adjustments for impairment to cover this risk		73
				4.3.1.3.		Policies regarding the risk of adverse effects occurring due to correlations		74
				4.3.1.4.		Impact of collaterals in the event of a downgrade in their credit rating		74
				4.3.2.		Amounts of counterparty risk		74
				4.3.2.1.		Credit derivative transactions		75

Page 2

		4.4.		Information on the standardized approach				76
				4.4.1.		Identification of external rating agencies		76
				4.4.2.		Assignment of the credit ratings of public share issues		77
				4.4.3.		Exposure values before and after the application of credit risk mitigation techniques		77
		4.5.		Information on the IRB method				79
				4.5.1.		General information		79
				4.5.1.1.		Authorization by the Bank of Spain for the use of the IRB method		79
				4.5.1.2.		Structure of internal rating systems and relationship between internal and external ratings		80
				4.5.1.3.		Use of internal estimations for purposes other than the calculation of capital requirements		81
				4.5.1.4.		Process for managing and recognizing the effects of credit risk mitigation		82
				4.5.1.5.		Mechanisms used for controlling internal rating systems		82
				4.5.1.6.		Description of the internal rating process		83
				4.5.1.7.		Definitions, methods and data for estimating and validating risk parameters		85
				4.5.2.		Exposure values by category and obligor grade		87
				4.5.3.		Comparative analysis of the estimates made		92
				4.5.3.1.		Impairment losses		99
				4.5.4.		Weightings of specialized lending exposures		100
				4.5.5.		Risk weightings of equity exposures		100
		4.6.		Information on securitizations				101
				4.6.1.		General characteristics of securitizations		101
				4.6.1.1.		Purpose of securitization		101
				4.6.1.2.		Functions pursued in the securitization process and degree of involvement		102
				4.6.1.3.		Methods used for the calculation of risk-weighted exposures in its securitization activity		103
				4.6.2.		Risk transfer in securitization activities		103
				4.6.3.		Investment or retained securitizations		103
				4.6.4.		Originated securitizations		104
				4.6.4.1.		Rating agencies used		104
				4.6.4.2.		Breakdown of securitized balances by type of asset		105
		4.7.		Information on credit risk mitigation techniques				106
				4.7.1.		Hedging based on netting operations on and off the balance sheet		106
				4.7.2.		Hedging based on collaterals		106
				4.7.2.1.		Management and valuation policies and procedures		106
				4.7.2.2.		Types of collaterals		107
				4.7.3.		Hedging based on personal collaterals		108
				4.7.4.		Risk concentration		109
		4.8.		RWA density by geographical area				109
5.		Market risk in trading book activities						111
		5.1.		Differences in the trading book for the purposes of applying the solvency regulations and the Accounting Circular				111
		5.2.		Standardized approach				111
		5.3.		Internal models				112
				5.3.1		Scope of application		112

Page 3

				5.3.2.		Features of the models used		112
				5.3.2.1		Market risk in 2014		114
				5.3.2.2		Stress testing		116
				5.3.2.3		Backtesting		117
				5.3.3		Characteristics of the risk management system		120
6.		Operational risk						121
		6.1.		Operational Risk definition				121
		6.2.		Operational Risk methodology				121
		6.3.		Model based on 3 lines of defense				122
		6.4.		Principles of BBVA’s Operational Risk management model				123
				6.4.1		Operational Risk management parameters		125
				6.4.2.		Operational Risk admission process		125
				6.4.3.		Operational Risk monitoring and management/mitigation tools		126
				6.4.3.1.		Risk and Control Self-Assessment		126
				6.4.3.2.		Operational Risk indicators		126
				6.4.3.3.		Operational losses database		127
				6.4.3.4.		Operational Risk scenarios		127
				6.4.4.		Mitigation plans		127
				6.4.5.		Tools		127
		6.5.		Methods employed				128
		6.6.		Description of the advanced measurement approaches				128
		6.7.		The Group’s Operational Risk profile				130
		6.8.		Governance of the Operational Risk model				131
				6.8.3.		Board of Directors		131
				6.8.4.		Executive Committee		131
				6.8.5.		Risk Committee		131
				6.8.6.		Global Risk Management Committee		131
				6.8.7.		Area ORM Committee		132
				6.8.8.		Corporate Assurance		132
7.		Equity investments and capital instruments not included in the trading book						133
		7.1.		Differentiation between portfolios held for sale and those held for strategic purposes				133
				7.1.1.		Portfolios held for sale		133
				7.1.2.		Portfolios held for strategic purposes		133
		7.2.		Accounting policies and instrument valuation				134
		7.3.		Value of equity investments and capital instruments				134
		7.4.		Exposure in equity investments and capital instruments				135

Page 4

8.		Interest-rate risk				138
		8.1.		Nature of interest rate risk and key hypotheses		138
		8.2.		Variations in interest rates		139
9.		Liquidity and funding risk				140
		9.1.		Governance and monitoring		140
		9.2.		Liquidity and funding prospects		140
		9.3.		Assets committed in finance transactions		144
10.		Leverage Ratio				145
		10.1.		Leverage Ratio definition and composition		145
		10.2.		Trends in the ratio		147
		10.3.		Governance		147
11.		Information on remuneration				148
		11.1.		Information on the decision-making process for establishing the remuneration policy for the Identified Staff		148
		11.2.		Description of the different types of employees and executive officers included in the Identified Staff		151
		11.3.		Key features of the remuneration system		151
		11.4.		Information on the connection between the remuneration of the Identified Staff and the performance of the Group		156
		11.5.		Description of the criteria used for taking into consideration present and future risks in the remuneration process		157
		11.6.		The main parameters and reasons for any component of the possible variable remuneration plans and other non-monetary benefits, specifically, the measures adopted for the members of the Identified Staff who are responsible for control functions		158
		11.7.		Ratios between the fixed and variable remuneration of the Identified Staff		158
		11.8.		Quantitative information on the remuneration of the Identified Staff		159
12.		Subsequent events				162

Page 5

Glossary

ACRONYM		DESCRIPTION
ALM (Asset-Liability Management)		Mechanism for managing structural balance sheet risk for possible imbalances between assets and liabilities and for different types of factors (interest rate, exchange rate, liquidity, etc.).
AMA		Advanced method used by the entity for calculating the capital requirements, consolidated by operational risk.
CNA		Competent National Authorities.
RWAs		Risk-Weighted Assets.
BBVA		Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria.
ECB		European Central Bank.
BoS		Bank of Spain.
EVA		Economic Value Added. EVA is the result of subtracting the economic profit from the result of multiplying the capital used in each business from the cost of capital or from the rate of return expected by investors.
BINs		Loss carry forwards.
BIS		Bank for International Settlements.
Basel III		Set of proposals for reforming banking regulation, published after December 16, 2010 and to be implemented gradually by 2019.
CCF (Credit Conversion Factor)		Conversion Factor: the ratio between the actual amount available for a commitment that could be used, and therefore, would be outstanding at the time of default, and the actual amount available for the commitment.
CDOs (Collateralized Debt Obligations)		Securitized financial instruments, usually with non-mortgage underlying assets.
EC		Executive Committee.
EC		Economic Capital. Maximum unfavorable deviation in the margin of the economic value for a given confidence level and time horizon.
ECaR		Minimum level of protection required against unexpected future losses by the different types of risk.
CIFH		Citic International Financial Holdings Limited.
FAFT		Master Agreement for Financial Transactions.
CNCB		China CITIC Bank Corporation.
CNMV		Spanish Securities and Exchange Commission.
ALCO		Assets and Liabilities Committee.
COCOs		Contingent convertible bonds.
COSO (Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission)		Voluntary committee made up of representatives from five private sector organizations in the U.S. to provide intellectual leadership in three interrelated areas: business risk management, internal control and fraud deterrence.
CRC		Board Risk Committee.
CRO		Group Risk Director.
CRR		Solvency Standards (EU 575/2013 Regulations).
CSA (Credit Support Annex)		Annexes to collateral agreements.
CVA (Credit Valuation Adjustment)		Value adjustments for credit risk: Need for a specific or generic provision to cover losses incurred for credit risk that has been recognized in the entity’s financial statements in accordance with the applicable accounting framework.
DLGD (Downturn LGD)		Loss given default in a period of stress in the cycle.
DTAs (Deferred Tax Assets)		Deferred tax assets.
DTCC		Depositary Trust & Clearing Corporation.
DVA (Debt Valuation Adjustment)		Value adjustment for the entity’s own credit risk: Need for a specific or generic provision to cover losses incurred for credit risk that has been recognized in the entity’s financial statements in accordance with the applicable accounting framework.

Page 6

EAD (Exposure at Default)		Risk exposure at default.
EBA (European Banking Authority)		European Banking Authority.
ECAI		External credit rating agencies.
EO		Original risk exposure.
EVRO		Operational Risk Assessment tool.
FROB		Fund for Orderly Bank Restructuring.
FTD (First to Default)		Derivative whereby both parties negotiate protection against the first default by any of the entities that make up the basket.
CORM		Corporate Operational Risk Management.
GMRU		Global Market Risk Unit.
GRM (Global Risk Management)		Global Risk Management.
GRMC		Global Risk Management Committee.
ORM		Operational Risk Management.
G-SIBs/ E-SIBs/ D-SIBs (Systemically Important Banks)		Additional capital buffers that the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision requires for belonging to a group of entities whose disorder may have a negative impact on the financial system globally.
HK$		Hong Kong Dollars.
ICMA (International Capital Market Association)		International Capital Market Association.
IFRS (International Financial Reporting Standard)		International Financial Reporting Standards.
EDTF (Enhanced Disclosures Task Force) report		Report that includes recommendations on information to be disclosed to the market.
IRB (Internal Risk Based)		Internal models used by the Entity.
IRC (Internal Risk Charge)		Loss associated with potential migration and default events in the bond and credit derivative portfolio.
ISDA (International Swaps and Derivatives Association)		International Swaps and Derivatives Association.
KCI (Key Control Indicators)		Indicators of controls associated with Operational Risk.
KRI (Key Risk Indicators)		Risk Indicators.
LCR (Liquidity Coverage Ratio)		Liquidity coverage ratio.
LDA (Loss Distribution Approach)		Advanced internal model that estimates the distribution of losses due to operational events.
LDP		Low default portfolios.
Act 36/2007		Act that amends Act 13/1985, dated May 25, on investment ratios, capital and reporting requirements of financial intermediaries and other financial system regulations.
LGD (Loss Given Default)		Loss in the event of default: the ratio between the loss in an exposure due to default by the counterparty and the outstanding amount at the time of default.
LIP (Loss Identification Period)		Time elapsed from the moment when the event that generates a given loss takes place and the moment when that loss is revealed at individual level.
LRLGD (Long Run Default)		Long-term loss given default.
LTD (Loan-to-Deposits)		Percentage of loans financed with deposits.
LTRO (Longer-Term Refinancing Operations)		Long-term refinancing operations promoted by the ECB.
LtSCD (Loan-to-Stable Customer Deposits)		Loan-to-stable customer deposit ratio.
LTV (Loan-to-Value)		Mathematical equation that measures the ratio between the amount lent and the value of the collateral.
EaR		Earnings at risk. Maximum unfavorable deviation in the net interest income for a given confidence level and time horizon.

Page 7

SSM		Single Supervisory Mechanism.
IAS		International Accounting Standards.
IFRS		International Financial Reporting Standards.
NSFR (Net Stable Funding Ratio)		Ratio that seeks to calculate the percentage of long-term assets that are financed with stable funding.
ORX (Operational Risk Exchange)		Non-profit association founded by twelve international banks in 2002 and that currently has 65 members in 18 countries.
OTC (Over-the-Counter)		Derivatives traded in over-the-counter markets.
ICAAP		Internal capital adequacy assessment process.
PD (Probability of Default)		Probability of default of a counterparty during a one-year period.
PD-TTC (Through the Cycle)		Probability of default over the course of the cycle.
EL (Expected Loss)		Ratio between the amount that is expected to be lost in an exposure -due to potential default by a counterparty or dilution over a 1-year period- and the amount outstanding at the time of default.
RDL		Royal Decree-Law.
OR		Operational Risk.
RW (Risk Weight)		Level of risk applied to exposures (%).
SAREB		Management Company for Assets Arising from Bank Restructuring.
SIRO		Internal operational risk database.
SIVs		Structured Investment Instruments.
STORM (Support Tool for Operational Risk Management)		Application used by the entity to support the integrated internal control and operational risk methodology.
TIER I (CET 1)		First-tier capital (basic capital).
TIER II (CET 2)		Second-tier capital (second-class capital).
TSR (Total Shareholders Return)		Indicator that measures the return on investment for shareholders.
UGLs		Liquidity Management Units.
VaR (Value at Risk)		Standard metric for measuring market risk. Indicates maximum losses at a 99% confidence level and a one-day time horizon.

Page 8

Correspondence between the sections of Pillar III and the Group’s Annual Consolidated Accounts as of 31-Dec-2014

BLOCK		POINTS		ANNUAL REPORT		AUDIT REPORT AND ANNUAL FINANCIAL STATEMENTS		IPR (PILLAR III)
Introduction		Regulatory environment		Page 173		Note 31		Section 0
General informational requirements		Reconciliation of the public balance sheet from the accounting perimeter to the regulatory perimeter		Page 176		Note 31		Section 1.1.3
		Main changes in the Group’s scope of consolidation in 2014		Page 43 - Page 45		Note 3		Section 1.1.4
		General control and risk management model		Page 52 - Page 60		Note 7.1		Section 1.4
Information on total eligible capital		Issues of preferred securities outstanding as of 31/Dec/2014		Page 223 - Page 225		Annex VI		Section 2.1
		Issues of Subordinated Debt as of 31/Dec/2014		Page 225		Annex VI		Section 2.1
		Issues of Contingent Convertible Bonds as of 31/Dec/2014		Page 223 - Page 225		Annex VI		Section 2.1
		Amount of capital		Page 174		Note 31		Section 2.2
		Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity with regulatory capital		Page 175		Note 31		Section 2.2
Credit risk		Exposure to credit risk		Page 63 - Page 64		Note 7.3.1		Section 4.2.1
		Distribution by geographical area		Page 67		Note 7.3.4		Section 4.2.3
		Value adjustments for impairment losses and allowances for contingent risks and commitments		Page 88		Note 7.3.8		Section 4.2.6
		Total impairment losses for the period		Page 191		Note 46		Section 4.2.7
		Assets and liabilities subject to contractual netting rights		Page 66		Note 7.3.3		Section 4.3.1.2
		Amounts of counterparty risk		Page 118		Note 10.4		Section 4.3.2
		Structure of internal rating systems and relationship between internal and external ratings		Page 81		Note 7.3.5		Section 4.5.1.2
		Definition and estimation of risk parameters		Page 24 - Page 25		Note 2.2		Section 4.5.1.7
Market risk in trading book activities		Scope of application of the internal models		Page 95		Note 7.4.1		Section 5.2.1
		Market risk development		Page 96		Note 7.4.1		Section 5.2.2.1
		VaR without smoothing by risk factors for the Group		Page 97		Note 7.4.1		Section 5.2.2.1
Operational risk		Operational risk definition		Page 105		Note 7.8		Section 6.1
		Operational risk management principles		Page 105		Note 7.8		Section 6.4
Investments in capital instruments not included in the trading book		Value of equity investments		Page 136		Note 16		Section 7.3
Interest rate risk		Variations in interest rates		Page 99		Note 7.4.2		Section 8.2
Liquidity and funding risk		Liquidity and funding prospects		Page 101		Note 7.5		Section 9.2
		Maturity of wholesale issues by nature		Page 31		Note 5.1		Section 9.2
		Assets committed in finance transactions		Page 102		Note 7.6		Section 9.3
		Collateral committed or potentially committed		Page 103		Note 7.6		Section 9.3
Remuneration		Variable share-based remuneration system		Page 187 - Page 189		Note 43.1.1		Section 11
Subsequent events		Subsequent events		Page 205		Note 55		Section 12

Page 9

Index of tables

TABLE No.		DESCRIPTION		IPR (PILLAR III)
Table 1		Calculation of the Capital Base according to CRD IV		Introduction
Table 2		Reconciliation of the Public Balance Sheet from the accounting perimeter to the regulatory perimeter		Section 1.1.3
Table 3		Main sources of the differences between original exposure and the book balance		Section 1.1.3
Table 4		Opening of the headings of the Public Balance Sheet for EO, EAD and RWAs		Section 1.1.3
Table 5		Trends in the main currencies comprising the Group’s exposure to structural exchange-rate risk		Section 1.5.4.2
Table 6		Issues of preferred securities outstanding as of 31/Dec/2014		Section 2.1
Table 7		Issues of subordinated debt as of 31/Dec/2014		Section 2.1
Table 8		Issues of Contingent Convertible Bonds as of 31/Dec/2014		Section 2.1
Table 9		Amount of capital		Section 2.2
Table 10		Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity with regulatory capital		Section 2.2
Table 11		Capital requirements by risk type		Section 3.1
Table 12		Positions subject to counterparty risk in terms of EO, EAD and RWAs		Section 3.1
Table 13		Amounts of counterparty risk in the trading book		Section 3.1
Table 14		Exposure to Credit Risk		Section 4.2.1
Table 15		Average value of the exposures throughout 2013 and 2014		Section 4.2.2
Table 16		Distribution by geographical area of exposure to credit risk		Section 4.2.3
Table 17		Distribution by geographical area of the book balances of the non-performing and impaired exposures of financial assets and contingent liabilities		Section 4.2.3
Table 18		Distribution by geographical area of the book balances of the value adjustments for impairment of financial assets and contingent liabilities		Section 4.2.3
Table 19		Distribution by sector of exposure to credit risk		Section 4.2.4
Table 20		Distribution by sector of the book balances of the non-performing and impaired exposures of financial assets and contingent liabilities		Section 4.2.4
Table 21		Distribution by sector of the book balances of the value adjustments for impairment of financial assets and contingent liabilities		Section 4.2.4
Table 22		Distribution by residual maturity of exposure to credit risk		Section 4.2.5
Table 23		Value adjustments for impairment losses and allowances for contingent risks and commitments		Section 4.2.6
Table 24		Total impairment losses for the period		Section 4.2.7
Table 25		Assets and liabilities subject to contractual netting rights		Section 4.3.1.2
Table 26		Counterparty risk. Exposure in derivatives. Netting effect and collateral		Section 4.3.2
Table 27		Counterparty risk. EAD derivatives by product and risk		Section 4.3.2
Table 28		Counterparty risk. Transactions with credit derivatives used in intermediation activities		Section 4.3.2.1
Table 29		Standardized approach: Exposure values before the application of credit risk mitigation techniques		Section 4.4.3
Table 30		Standardized approach: Exposure values after the application of credit risk mitigation techniques		Section 4.4.3
Table 31		Variations in the period in terms of RWAs for the Credit Risk standardized approach		Section 4.4.3
Table 32		Models authorized by the Bank of Spain for the purpose of their use in the calculation of capital requirements		Section 4.5.1.1
Table 33		Master Scale of BBVA’s rating		Section 4.5.1.2
Table 34		Advanced measurement approach: Exposure values by category and obligor grade		Section 4.5.2
Table 35		Variations in the period in terms of RWAs for the Credit Risk advanced measurement approach		Section 4.5.2

Page 10

Table 36		Balance of specific, generic and country risk allowances for losses, by exposure category		Section 4.5.3.1
Table 37		Exposures assigned to each one of the risk weightings of the specialized lending exposures		Section 4.5.4
Table 38		Exposures assigned to each one of the risk weightings of the equity exposures		Section 4.5.5
Table 39		Amounts in terms of EAD of investment and retained securitization positions		Section 4.6.3
Table 40		Distribution of securitizations subject to risk weighting and deducted from capital		Section 4.6.3
Table 41		Variations in terms of RWAs of investment and retained securitizations		Section 4.6.3
Table 42		Breakdown of securitized balances by type of asset		Section 4.6.4.2
Table 43		Outstanding balance corresponding to the underlying assets of the Group’s originated securitizations, in which risk transfer criteria are not fulfilled		Section 4.6.4.2
Table 44		Exposure covered with financial collateral and other collateral calculated using the standardized approach		Section 4.7.2.2
Table 45		Exposure covered by personal guarantees. Standardized and advanced approach		Section 4.7.3
Table 46		Breakdown of RWAs density by geographical area and approach		Section 4.8
Table 47		Trading Book. Items on the balance sheet subject to market risk under internal model		Section 5.2.1
Table 48		Trading Book. VaR without smoothing by risk factors		Section 5.2.2.1
Table 49		Trading Book. Market risk. Regulatory capital		Section 5.2.2.1
Table 50		Trading Book. Impact on earnings in Lehman scenario		Section 5.2.2.2
Table 51		Trading Book. Stress resampling		Section 5.2.2.2
Table 52		Characteristics of the Operational Risk management model		Section 6.4
Table 53		Regulatory capital for Operational Risk		Section 6.6
Table 54		Breakdown of book value, EAD and RWAs of equity investments		Section 7.3
Table 55		Exposure in equity investments and capital instruments		Section 7.4
Table 56		Realized profit and loss from sales and settlements of equity investments and capital instruments		Section 7.4
Table 57		Unrealized profit and loss for latent revaluation of equity investments and capital instruments		Section 7.4
Table 58		Breakdown of RWAs, equity investments and capital instruments by applicable approach		Section 7.4
Table 59		Variation in RWAs for Equity Risk		Section 7.4
Table 60		Variations in interest rates		Section 8.2
Table 61		Types and amounts of instruments included in the liquidity fund of the most significant units		Section 9.2
Table 62		Maturity of wholesale issues by nature		Section 9.2
Table 63		Assets committed or unencumbered		Section 9.3
Table 64		Collateral committed or potentially committed		Section 9.3
Table 65		Committed assets/collateral assigned and associated liabilities		Section 9.3
Table 66		Elements comprising the leverage ratio		Section 10.1
Table 67		Composition of the Remuneration Committee		Section 11.1
Table 68		Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (I)		Section 11.8
Table 69		Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (II)		Section 11.8
Table 70		Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (III)		Section 11.8
Table 71		Number of people with total remuneration in excess of €1 million in 2014		Section 11.8

Page 11

Index of charts

CHART No.		DESCRIPTION		IPR (PILLAR III)
Chart 1		Schedule for gradual adaptation to CRD IV		Introduction
Chart 2		Risk Appetite		Section 1.4.2
Chart 3		Trends in the main currencies comprising the Group’s exposure to structural exchange-rate risk		Section 1.5.4.2
Chart 4		Capital requirements by risk type		Section 3.1
Chart 5		Distribution by geographical area of exposure to credit risk		Section 4.2.3
Chart 6		EAD for derivatives broken down by risk		Section 4.3.2
Chart 7		Advanced measurement approach: EAD by obligor category		Section 4.5.2
Chart 8		Advanced measurement approach: Average weighted PD by EAD		Section 4.5.2
Chart 9		Advanced measurement approach: Average weighted DLGD by EAD		Section 4.5.2
Chart 10		Advanced measurement approach: Average weighted risk by EAD		Section 4.5.2
Chart 11		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Retail mortgages		Section 4.5.3
Chart 12		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Consumer finance		Section 4.5.3
Chart 13		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Credit cards		Section 4.5.3
Chart 14		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Automobiles		Section 4.5.3
Chart 15		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: SMEs and Developers		Section 4.5.3
Chart 16		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Mexico Credit Cards		Section 4.5.3
Chart 17		Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Mexico Corporates		Section 4.5.3
Chart 18		Functions carried out in the securitization process and degree of involvement of the Group		Section 4.6.1.2
Chart 19		Trading Book. Trends in VaR without smoothing		Section 5.2.2.1
Chart 20		Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA S.A. Hypothetical backtesting		Section 5.2.2.3
Chart 21		Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA S.A. Real backtesting		Section 5.2.2.3
Chart 22		Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA Bancomer. Hypothetical backtesting		Section 5.2.2.3
Chart 23		Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA Bancomer. Real backtesting		Section 5.2.2.3
Chart 24		Operational risk management framework: Three lines of defense		Section 6.3
Chart 25		Operational Risk: Capital required by method		Section 6.6
Chart 26		BBVA Group’s Operational Risk Profile		Section 6.7
Chart 27		Operational Risk Profile by risk and country		Section 6.7
Chart 28		Trends in the leverage ratio		Section 10.1

Page 12

Executive Summary

Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria Group (the “Group” or “BBVA Group”) is an internationally diversified financial group with a significant presence in traditional retail banking, asset management and wholesale banking.

Diversification is essential for ensuring resilience in any environment. The Group’s structure is very well balanced in terms of geographical areas, businesses and segments. This means it can maintain a high level of recurring revenue despite the environment and economic cycles.

The Group’s strategy is based on managing solid franchises, with a sufficient critical customer mass and leading positions in their respective markets. The Group analyzes the market continuously to detect attractive and profitable investment opportunities, within its policy of active portfolio management aimed at generating maximum shareholder value. The execution of this strategy in the medium and long term has led BBVA to reach agreements in 2014 on a number of operations, which are explained in section 1.1.4 of this report.

Finally, BBVA continues to make progress in its digital transformation process, closing 2014 with 9 million digital customers who interact with the Bank via the Internet on their cell phones.

The above is manifested in the milestones that the Group has achieved in 2014:

In addition to the operations it carries out directly, the Bank heads a group of subsidiaries, jointly-controlled businesses and associate institutions which perform a wide range of activities and which, together with the Bank, constitute BBVA Group. This allows BBVA Group to achieve a high level of geographical diversification, which is one of the levers of sustainable growth and organic generation of highly satisfactory earnings.

The year 2014 closed with positive growth in different performance areas, on both the cost management side and generation of income. As a result, the solvency position in the market was improved.

Page 13

With respect to liquidity, the wholesale finance markets have continued buoyant, and BBVA and its franchises have accessed the markets frequently. In addition, the new targeted longer-term refinancing operations (TLTROs) announced by the European Central Bank (ECB), combined with the growing weight of retail deposits, have continued to strengthen the Group’s liquidity position and improve its funding structure, thus maintaining very favorable liquidity ratios in terms of LTD (Loan to Deposits) and LCR (Liquidity Coverage Ratio).

In credit risk, there has been a reduction of the NPA ratio, as well as an increase in the coverage ratios, thus strengthening still further the entity’s good credit risk position.

With respect to solvency, BBVA has increased its phased-in and fully-loaded capital ratios, thanks to organic generation of earnings and capital increases carried out over the year. This has maintained its capital levels far above the minimum required with a leverage ratio (fully loaded) that is very favorable compared with the rest of its peer group. This will all be described in greater detail throughout this report.

Page 14

Introduction

Regulatory environment in 2014

• Legal changes in the Community area

• Legal changes at international level

On January 1, 2014, the CRD-IV package entered into force, made up of a Directive (Directive 2013/36/EU) and a Regulation (Regulation 575/2013/EU). It represents the implementation at European level of the recommendations of the Basel Committee, known as Basel III. The Directive must be transposed by the Member States, while the Regulation is directly applicable. The two instruments replace Directive 2006/48/EC, of June 14, relating to the taking up and pursuit of the business of credit institutions, and Directive 2006/49/EC, of June 14, on the capital adequacy of investment firms and credit institutions, of the European Parliament and of the Council. Between them they constitute what we will below cite as the Solvency Regulations.

On the domestic front, with the aim of adapting to this new regulatory environment, the government passed the Law on regulation, supervision and solvency (Law 10/2014 of June 26). This law and its implementing regulations repeal the following: Law 13/1985, of May 25, on the investment ratios, bank capital and reporting requirements of financial intermediaries; Royal Decree 216/2008 of February 15, on the capital of financial institutions; and certain articles of the Bank of Spain Circular 3/2008 of May 22.

In accordance with Regulation 575/2013/EU, financial institutions have to publish certain “Information of Prudential Relevance” with the content required in Part 8 of the Regulation. The requirements laid out in the Regulation are directly applicable to Member States. This report has therefore been drawn up in keeping with these requirements.

In accordance with the policy defined by the Group for drawing up the Information of Prudential Relevance, the content of this report refers through December 31, 2014 and was approved by the Group’s Audit and Compliance Committee at its meeting held on February 23, 2015, having previously been reviewed by the External Auditor. This review has not revealed any material discrepancies concerning compliance with the reporting requirements laid down in Part 8 of Regulation 575/2013/EU.

Regulatory environment in 2014

Legal changes in the Community area

European Commission / European Parliament / European Council

In December 2010 the Committee on Banking Supervision published the document“Basel III: A global regulatory framework for more resilient banks and banking systems,” in order to improve the sector’s ability to withstand the impacts arising from financial and economic crises.

Page 15

Since then, the European Union has worked to incorporate these Basel recommendations. After two years of negotiations, the so-called CRD-IV was published on June 27, 2013 in the Official Journal of the European Union. CRD-IV consists of a Directive that replaces capital Directives 2006/48 and 2006/49 and a common Regulation (575/2013). These Directives require transposition, while the Regulation is directly applicable.

Transposition to national law began on November 29, 2013 with the publication of the Royal Decree-Law 14/2013 adapting Spanish law to the European Union law with respect to the supervision and solvency of financial institutions. It has continued with the approval of the Law on the regulation, supervision and solvency of financial institutions.

This Law recasts the main laws governing the regulation and discipline of credit institutions into a single text. It is a single legal text that not only transposes the law recently issued by the European Union, but also integrates the Spanish laws regulating these matters.

Since January 1, 2014, the BBVA Group has applied the criteria established in the European Directive and Regulation and the Spanish legislation implementing them.

The new regulations require institutions to have a higher and better quality capital level, increase capital deductions and review the requirements associated with certain assets. Unlike the previous framework, the minimum capital requirements are complemented with requirements for capital buffers and others relating to liquidity and leverage.

The capital base under CRD-IV consists mainly of the following elements:

TABLE 1: Calculation of the Capital Base according to CRD IV

CET 1		Common Equity Tier I
+		Capital
+		Reserves
+		Non-controlling interests up to limit when calculating
–		Goodwill and other intangible assets
–		Treasury stock
–		Loans financing treasury stock
–		DTAs for loss carry forwards
–		DVA
–		Prudent Valuation
–		Limits applicable to Financial Institutions + Insurance Companies + DTAS for temporary differences
T1		Tier I
+		AT1 and preferred securities that meet calculation criteria
+		Remaining non-controlling interests not assessed in CET1
–		Goodwill and other intangible assets for the part not deducted in CET1
Total T1		CET1 +T1
T2		Tier II
+		Subordinated debt under new criteria
+		Preferred securities not assessed in T1
+		Generic Provision
–		Remaining non-controlling interests not assessed in CET1 and T1
Capital Base		Tier I + Tier II

The most relevant aspects affecting common equity and risk-weighted assets are summarized below.

The main impacts affecting common equity Tier I (CET1) arise in the limit used when calculating non-controlling interests and the deductions for significant and non-significant financial holdings, insurance companies and deferred taxes. Thus, deferred taxes from loss carry forwards, the provision deficit on expected loss for IRB models and the debt valuation adjustment (DVA) of derivatives will now be deducted directly from CET1.

Page 16

In the calculation of the Additional Tier 1, only issues convertible into shares or redeemable at the option of the authority and subject to capital ratio triggers are calculated.

There are stricter requirements for risk-weighted assets, mainly for counterparty risk in derivatives and exposures within the financial sector.

The gradual adaptation schedule detailed below has been established for compliance with the new capital ratios:

CHART 1: Schedule for gradual adaptation to CRD IV

As of December 31, 2014, according to the new CRD-IV requirements that took effect in 2014, BBVA Group’s fully-loaded CET1 ratio stood at 10.4%, well over the minimum CET1 that will be required in 2019 (7%), demonstrating the Group’s comfortable capital position. The phased-in CET1 ratio according to the new CRD-IV rules stood at 11.9%as of December 31, 2014.

These requirements may be increased by the counter-cyclical capital buffer requirement, the systemic bank capital buffer requirement and the systemic risk buffer requirement, should they apply and be in force (mainly starting in 2016).

The capital requirement for systemic banks is established based on the bank’s systemicity, which is determined based on a number of variables that include: the bank’s size, interconnection with the financial system, substitutability of the services it offers, complexity and cross-border activity.

The systemic risk capital requirement aims to prevent and mitigate possible effects associated with risks in the system that are not cyclical, as well as macroprudential risks, when the materialization of such risks may have a negative impact on the financial system itself or on the real economy.

BBVA Group is currently considered a global systemic entity according to the list prepared by the Financial Stability Board (FSB). Of the 5 possible tranches, with requirements ranging from 1% to 3.5%, BBVA Group is in the first of these tranches, with an additional requirement of 1% as a global systemic entity, applicable in fourths from 2016 to 2019.

However, as of the date referred to by the data in this report, none of those additional capital requirements for conservation, applied, i.e: the capital conservation requirement, the anticyclical capital requirement and the systemic risk requirement were 0%.

Page 17

In order to provide the financial system with a metric that serves as a backstop to capital levels, irrespective of the credit risk, a measure complementing all the other capital indicators has been incorporated into Basel III and transposed to the Solvency Regulations. This measure, the leverage ratio, can be used to estimate the percentage of the assets financed with Tier 1 capital.

Although the book value of the assets used in this ratio is adjusted to reflect the bank’s current or potential leverage with a given balance-sheet position, the leverage ratio is intended to be an objective measure that may be reconciled with the financial statements.

In recent months, the industry has made a significant effort to standardize both the definition and calculation of the leverage ratio and the minimum level that should be required from financial institutions to collateral that adequate levels of leverage are maintained. Although this definition and the calibration will enter into force in 2018, BBVA estimates and tracks this measure, as reported in section 10 of this report.

Other relevant changes

• Single Supervisory Mechanism (SSM): The European Central Bank¹, as the body responsible for ensuring the security and soundness of the European banking system, and for extending financial integration and stability in the euro zone, has begun a process aimed at setting up a new single financial supervision system made up of the ECB and the national competent authorities of the participating European Union countries (hereinafter, the NCAs).

With the aim of collateraling greater transparency in the balance-sheets of the affected entities, in 2014 the ECB carried out a comprehensive assessment of the entities before assuming full responsibility for supervision on November 4, 2014.

The Comprehensive Assessment, which concluded in October 2014, was based on the following pillars:

• An Asset Quality Review to improve the transparency of bank positions through an examination of the quality of the assets, including their adequacy and the assessment of the related collaterals and arrangements.

• Stress Tests aimed at determining the resilience of the banks’ balance sheets.

According to the ECB exercise, BBVA had a CET1 capital level of 10.6% for the baseline scenario and 9.0% for the adverse scenario in December 2016, above the minimum levels required.

The ratio for the adverse scenario is above the average for the banks analyzed by the ECB (8.3%).

BBVA would have a fully loaded CET1 capital level of 8.2% in 2016 under the adverse scenario.

The SSM, which began to operate officially in November 2014, represents a step toward greater harmonization at European level. The ECB is responsible for the effective and coherent operation of the SSM. It supervises the operation of the system through a distribution of competences between the ECB and the NCAs, as established under the SSM Regulation. To collateral effective supervision, credit institutions are classified as “significant” or “less significant”. The former are supervised directly by the ECB, while the NCAs are responsible for the supervision of the latter.

¹  http://www.ecb.europa.eu/home/html/index.en.html

Page 18

The SSM is responsible for the prudential supervision of all the credit institutions in the participating Member States. The three main objectives of the SSM are to:

• collateral the security and solidity of the European banking system;

• strengthen financial integration and stability;

• achieve a uniform supervision.

The ECB directly supervises all the entities classified as significant (some 120 groups), with the assistance of the NCAs. They include BBVA Group. Day-to-day supervision is carried out by the joint supervisory teams (JSTs) made up of NCA and ECB staff.

The NCAs will continue to supervise directly the less significant banks, numbering around 3,500, under the supervision of the ECB.

EBA Revision of Pillar III

In January 2015 the EBA published its “guidelines on materiality, proprietary and confidentiality and on disclosure frequency.” These technical guidelines define the processes and criteria that institutions must follow to identify material, confidential or proprietary information under Pillar III. In addition, the guidelines aim to specify what institutions must report prudential information with a frequency of less than a year, as well as the details of the information to be reported by them. None of these recommendations are in force at the date of this report.

Details of all the regulatory changes (IFRS) included within the framework of consolidation for accounting purposes are included in Note 2.3 of the Group’s Annual Financial Statements.

Legal changes at international level

In 2013 the debate on the need for structural reforms in the system became increasingly significant. This debate has adopted different approaches in the different geographical regions.

In the United States, the Volcker Rule came into effect, aimed at restricting proprietary trading activities by U.S. banking institutions, i.e. trading with derivatives or other financial instruments not financed by deposits, in order to obtain a profit. In 2014 BBVA made progress in the process of implementing the Volcker Rule.

On January 29 2014, the European Commission (EC) announced its proposal for structural reform, which would impose new restrictions on the structure of European banks. The proposal aims to collateral the harmonization of divergent national initiatives in Europe.

However, the EC goes beyond national legislation in many European countries and opts for a mixed solution that establishes:

• The prohibition of proprietary trading, similarly to the aforementioned Volcker Rule; and

• A mechanism to require the separation of commercial activities, following the model of the banking reform in the United Kingdom.

The proposal is twofold, as it imposes both the prohibition of proprietary trading operations and investments in hedge funds and the separation of commercial activities.

The EC’s reform is stricter than most of the national initiatives in countries like France, Germany or the U.S., as it goes beyond the recommendations of the High-Level Expert Group set up by the EC itself, which recommends a separation of proprietary trading operations, but not the prohibition of commercial activities.

Page 19

The scope of the banks subject to the reform is very wide. All European global systemically important Banks (G-SIB) and institutions that carry out significant commercial activities, i.e. around 29 European banks, will be subject to this new regulation.

Basel Revision of Pillar III

In addition to the recommendations made by the EBA, the Basel Committee is in the process of revising the Pillar III framework. This process is expected to be complete in December 2015. The main aim of the revision is to improve the comparability and consistency of information. The proposal is to make greater use of templates:

• Mandatory templates for quantitative information that are considered essential for the analysis of regulatory capital requirements. They must be filled out by all the banks as specified.

• Templates with a more flexible format for qualitative information, considered valuable for the market but not essential for evaluating capital requirements. They may be filled out by banks according to an established format or following their own formats.

Page 20

1. General informational requirements

Company name and differences in the consolidable group for the purposes of the Solvency Regulations and the Accounting Circular

• Corporate name and scope of application

• Differences in the consolidable group for the purposes of the Solvency Regulations and the Accounting Circular

• Reconciliation of the Public Balance Sheet from the accounting perimeter to the regulatory perimeter

• Main changes in the Group’s scope of consolidation in 2014

Identification of dependent institutions with capital below the minimum requirement. Possible impediments for transferring capital.

Exemptions from capital requirements at the individual or sub-consolidated level

General control and risk management model

• Governance and organization

• Risk Appetite

• Decisions and processes

• Evaluation, monitoring and reporting

• Infrastructure

• Risk culture

Scope and nature of the risk measurement and reporting systems

Risk hedging and reduction policies: Supervision strategies and processes

1.1. Company name and differences in the consolidable group for the purposes of the Solvency Regulations and the Accounting Circular

1.1.1. Corporate name and scope of application

Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria, S.A. (hereinafter, “the Bank” or “BBVA”) is a private-law entity subject to the rules and regulations governing banking institutions operating in Spain.

The Bylaws and other public information about the Bank are available for consultation at its registered address (Plaza San Nicolás, 4 Bilbao) and on its official website: www.bbva.com.

The Solvency Regulations are applicable at the consolidated level for the whole Group.

1.1.2. Differences in the consolidable group for the purposes of the Solvency Regulations and the Accounting Circular

The Group’s consolidated financial statements are drawn up in accordance with what is laid down in the International Financial Reporting Standards adopted by the European Union (hereinafter, “EU-IFRS”).

The EU-IFRS were adapted to the sector of Spanish credit institutions by Bank of Spain Circular 4/2004 of December 22 (hereinafter the Accounting Circular), as well as its successive modifications.

Page 21

Bank of Spain Circulars 5/2013 of October 30, 2013 on public and restricted financial reporting rules and 5/2011 of November 30, 2011 on financial statement models also apply.

For the purposes of the Accounting Circular, companies are considered to form part of a consolidated group when the controlling institution holds or can hold, directly or indirectly, control of them. An institution is understood to control another entity when it is exposed, or is entitled to variable returns as a result of its involvement in the subsidiary and has the capacity to influence those returns through the power it exercises on the subsidiary. For such control to exist, the following aspects must be fulfilled:

• a) Power: An investor has power over a subsidiary when it has current rights that provide it with the capacity to direct its relevant activities, i.e. those that significantly affect the returns of the subsidiary;

• b) Returns: An investor is exposed, or is entitled to variable returns as a result of its involvement in the subsidiary when the returns obtained by the investor for such involvement may vary based on the economic performance of the subsidiary. Investor returns may be positive only, negative only or both positive and negative.

• c) Relationship between power and returns: An investor has control over a subsidiary when it not only has power over the subsidiary and is exposed, or is entitled to variable returns for its involvement in the subsidiary, but also has the capacity to use its power to influence the returns it obtains due to its involvement in the subsidiary.

Therefore, in drawing up the Group’s consolidated Financial Statements, all dependent companies and consolidated structured entities have been consolidated by applying the full consolidation method.

Jointly-controlled entities, as well as joint ventures (those over which joint control arrangements are in place), are valued using the equity method.

The list of all the companies forming part of the BBVA Group is included in the appendices to the Group’s Annual Consolidated Financial Statements.

For the purposes of the Solvency Regulations, as set out in Spanish Law 36/2007, heading two, section 3.4, the consolidated group comprises the following subsidiaries:

• Credit institutions.

• Investment services companies.

• Open-end funds.

• Companies managing mutual funds, together with companies managing pension funds, whose sole purpose is the administration and management of the aforementioned funds.

• Companies managing mortgage securitization funds and asset securitization funds.

• Venture capital companies and venture capital fund managers.

• Institutions whose main activity is holding shares or investments, unless they are mixed-portfolio financial corporations supervised at the financial conglomerate level.

Likewise, the special-purpose entities whose main activity implies a prolongation of the business of any of the institutions included in the consolidation, or includes the rendering of back-office services to these, will also form part of the consolidated group.

However, according to the provisions of this law, insurance entities and some service firms do not form part of consolidated groups of credit institutions.

Therefore, for the purposes of calculating solvency requirements, and hence the drawing up of this Information of Prudential Relevance, the scope of consolidated institutions is different from the scope defined for the purposes of drawing up the Group’s Financial Statements.

Page 22

The effect of the difference between the two regulations is basically due to:

• The difference between the balance contributed by entities (largely real-estate, insurance and service companies) that are consolidated in the Group’s Financial Statements by the full consolidation method, but are consolidated for the purposes of Solvency by applying the equity method. The details of these companies are available in Annexes I and II of these documents; mainly the companies BBVA Seguros and the Bancomer pension company.

• The entry of the balance from institutions (mainly financial) that are not consolidated at the accounting level but for purposes of solvency. Details of these companies are available in Annex IV of this document (the biggest balance is that contributed by Garanti).

1.1.3. Reconciliation of the Public Balance Sheet from the accounting perimeter to the regulatory perimeter

This section includes an exercise in transparency aimed at offering a clear view of the process of reconciliation between the book balances reported in the Public Balance Sheet (attached to the Group’s Annual Consolidated Financial Statements) and the book balances this report uses (regulatory scope).

TABLE 2: Reconciliation of the Public Balance Sheet from the accounting perimeter to the regulatory perimeter

Public Balance Sheet Headings		Public Balance Sheet				Insurance companies and real-estate finance companies (1)				Jointly-controlled entities and other adjustments (2)				Regulatory balance sheet
Cash and Balances at Central Banks			31,430				(1	)			2,480				33,909
Trading Book			83,258				(1,008	)			2,327				84,577
Asset at fair value through P/L (FVTPL)			2,761				(2,189	)			18				590
AFS financial assets			94,875				(18,394	)			3,875				80,356
Loans and receivables			372,375				(859	)			17,959				389,475
Held-to-maturity investments			—				—				0				0
Adjustments to financial assets for portfolio hedges			121				—				—				121
Hedging derivatives			2,551				(169	)			15				2,396
Non-current assets held for sale			3,793				(19	)			99				3,873
Investments			4,509				3,615				(3,891	)			4,233
Other			36,270				(1,807	)			3,580				38,043
Total Assets			631,942				(20,830	)			26,460				637,572

(1) Balances corresponding to the companies not consolidated for solvency purposes (see Annex)

(2) Corresponds to the balances contributed by Garanti, developers and other intra-group removals

Below is a table summarizing the main sources of the differences between the amount of exposure in regulatory terms and the book balances according to the Financial Statements:

Page 23

TABLE 3: Main sources of the differences between original exposure and the book balance

Amount corresponding to the asset’s book balance in the regulatory consolidation scope			637,572
Amount corresponding to the liability’s book value in the regulatory consolidation scope (Repo)			44,965
Total net amount in the regulatory consolidation scope			72,967
Amount of off-balance-sheet losses (risks and contingent commitments)			147,423
Counterparty risk in derivatives (includes the add-on)			26,605
Accounting provisions*			13,572
Non-eligibility of the Trading Book			-84,577
Non-eligibility of the balances corresponding to accounting hedges (derivatives)			-2,396
Non-eligibility of the balances corresponding to accounting hedges (adjustments for micro-hedging/portfolio hedges)			-1,781
Non-eligibility of intangible assets			-8,853
Non-eligibility of insurance contracts linked to pensions			-2,189
Non-eligibility of tax assets			-6,585
Non-eligibility of other financial assets (mainly balances of guarantees provided in cash)			-6,229
Non-eligibility of accounts without loan book risk (premiums, transaction costs)			-377
Non-eligibility of underlying assets of securitizations			-993
Other (1)			-653
Amount of exposures for regulatory purposes			755,503

* Excluding the generic provision eligible as capital

⁽¹⁾  Includes, among others, certain asset accrual accounts, as well as other accounts without risk

This shows the headings of the Public Balance Sheet by EO, EAD and APRs, which are the risk concepts on which this document is based.

TABLE 4: Opening of the headings of the Public Balance Sheet for EO, EAD and APRs

										12/31/2014
(millions of euros)		Credit risk
Public Balance Sheet Headings		Original exposure				EAD				RWAs
1. CASH AND BALANCES AT CENTRAL BANKS			33,914				33,914				12,662
2. TRADING BOOK			26,605				26,159				8,580
3. FINANCIAL ASSETS DESIGNATED AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS			590				590				358
4. AVAILABLE-FOR-SALE FINANCIAL ASSETS			78,957				78,536				21,376
5. LOANS AND RECEIVABLES			543,766				444,272				217,112
9. NON-CURRENT ASSETS HELD FOR SALE			2,961				2,961				3,238
12. INVESTMENTS			4,061				4,061				9,697
13. TANGIBLE ASSETS			7,618				7,618				7,450
16. OTHER ASSETS			7,202				7,202				5,523
17. TAX ASSETS			4,866				4,866				9,011
3. ASSETS SOLD UNDER REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS			44,965				42,946				917
TOTAL ASSETS + LIABILITIES			755,503				653,124				295,925

1.1.4. Main changes in the Group’s scope of consolidation in 2014

Ongoing operations

1.1.4.1.  Agreement for the acquisition of an additional 14.9% in Garanti

On November 19, 2014 the Group concluded a new agreement with Dogus Holding A.S., Ferit Faik Sahenk, Dianne Sahenk and Defne Sahenk (hereinafter “Dogus”) for the acquisition of 62,538,000,000 shares in Garanti for a maximum total payment of 8.90 Turkish lira per share, equivalent to a maximum total of around 5,566 million Turkish lira.

The effective acquisition and entry into force of the new agreement are subject to obtaining the pertinent regulatory authorizations from the Turkish, Spanish and European authorities, and from any other countries as necessary. Following the acquisition of the new shares, the Group’s stake in Garanti will be 39.9%.

In accordance with the IFRS-EU, as a result of the entry into force of the new agreement, BBVA Group will value the stake in Garanti (currently registered as a joint venture by the equity method) at fair value and consolidate Garanti into the BBVA Group’s consolidated Financial Statements starting on the date of effective control (which is expected in 2015), subject to obtaining the regulatory authorizations mentioned above.

Page 24

The estimate of the impact on the Group’s consolidated Financial Statements is a non-recurring negative impact on the net attributable profit of around €1.5 billion, most of it resulting from conversion differences due to the depreciation of the Turkish lira against the euro since the initial acquisition. These conversion differences are already registered as valuation adjustments, which lower the BBVA Group’s capital. The recognition of this accounting impact will not mean any additional cash divestment for BBVA. The final impact must be calculated on the date of effective acquisition of the shares and may vary due to questions such as changes in the TL/EUR exchange rate, the earnings generated by the Garanti group, etc.

1.1.4.2.  Award of Catalunya Banc

On July 21, 2014, the Governing Board of the Fund for Orderly Bank Restructuring (FROB) awarded BBVA the acquisition of Catalunya Banc, S.A., hereinafter “Catalunya Banc”, under a competitive bid process.

As a result, a share purchase/sale contract was concluded between FROB and BBVA by which FROB will sell BBVA up to 100% of the shares in Catalunya Banc for up to €1,187 million.

This price will be reduced by €267 million if before the closing date of the operation the FROB and Catalunya Banc have not obtained confirmation from the tax authorities regarding the expected application of the regime governing deferred tax assets (introduced by Royal Decree-Law 14/2013) to certain losses generated in the consolidated Financial Statements of Catalunya Banc in 2013, which originated in the transfer of assets to Sociedad de Gestión de Activos Procedentes de la Reestructuración Bancaria, S.A. (SAREB).

The execution of the purchase/sale is subject to a number of questions, among them obtaining the corresponding administrative authorizations and approvals, and the final closure of the operation announced by Catalunya Banc to the market on July 17, 2014, by which Catalunya Banc will transfer to an asset securitization fund a portfolio of loans with a nominal value of €6,392 million.

1.1.4.3.  Agreement for the partial sale of CNCB

On January 23, 2015, the BBVA Group announced it had signed an agreement to sell 4.9% of the share capital of China CITIC Bank Corporation Limited (CNCB) to UBS AG, London Branch (UBS); which, in turn has signed a number of agreements (the “Operations”), according to which the CNCB shares shall be transferred to a third party and the final economic beneficiary of the ownership of these shares shall be Xinhu Zhongbao Co. Ltd. (Xinhu).

The sale price to be paid by UBS is HKD 5.73 per share, and the total amount will be HKD 13,136 million, equivalent to €1,460 million (calculated at the exchange rate of HKD/EUR = 8.9957, current at the close of January 15, 2015).

The agreement between UBS and BBVA will be executed on completion of the legal and corporate requirements needed to carry out the Operations related to Xinhu.

As of December 31, 2014, the stake in CNCB is registered under the heading “Available-for-Sale Financial Assets.”

The agreement is expected to be closed in the first quarter of 2015. The estimated impact on BBVA Group’s consolidated Financial Statements is of a net gain of around €400 million.

Page 25

1.1.4.4.  Agreement for the sale of the stake in Citic International Financial Holdings Limited (CIFH)

On December 23, 2014, the Group signed an agreement to sell its 29.68% stake in Citic International Financial Holdings Limited (CIFH), the unlisted subsidiary of CNCB headquartered in Hong Kong, to China CITIC Bank Corporation Limited. The sale price of this stake is HKD 8,162 million. The execution of the agreement is subject to obtaining the pertinent authorizations. The estimated impact on Group’s consolidated Financial Statements is of a negative effect on earnings of approximately €25 million.

1.2. Identification of dependent institutions with capital below the minimum requirement. Possible impediments for transferring capital.

There is no institution in the Group not included in the consolidated Group for the purpose of the solvency regulations whose capital are below the regulatory minimum requirement.

The Group operates in Spain, Mexico, the United States and 30 other countries, largely in Europe and Latin America. The Group’s banking subsidiaries around the world are subject to supervision and regulation (with respect to issues such as compliance with a minimum level of regulatory capital) by a number of regulatory bodies. The obligation to comply with these capital requirements may affect the capacity of these banking subsidiaries to transfer funds to the parent company via dividends or other means.

In some jurisdictions in which the Group operates, the law lays down that dividends may only be paid with the funds legally available for this purpose.

1.3. Exemptions from capital requirements at the individual or sub-consolidated level

In accordance with the provisions the Solvency Regulations on the exemption from individual or consolidated compliance with the aforementioned rule for Spanish credit institutions belonging to a consolidated group, the Group obtained exemption from the Bank of Spain on December 30, 2009 for the following companies (this update was ratified through decision ECB 1024/2013):

• Banco Industrial de Bilbao, S.A.

• Banco de Promoción de Negocios, S.A.

• BBVA Banco de Financiación, S.A.

• Banco Occidental, S.A.

1.4. General risk control and management model

BBVA Group has a General Risk Control and Management Model (hereinafter, “the Model”) adapted to its business model, organization and the geographical areas in which it operates. It allows it to operate within the framework of the control and risk management strategy defined by the Bank’s company bodies and adapt to an economic and regulatory environment, addressing management globally and adapted to the circumstances at any particular time. The Model establishes a system of risk management that is adapted to the entity’s risk profile and strategy.

Page 26

This Model is applied comprehensively in the Group and is made up of the basic elements set out below:

• Governance and organization

• Risk Appetite

• Decisions and processes

• Evaluation, monitoring and reporting

• Infrastructure

The Group promotes the development of a risk culture that ensures the consistent application of the risk control and management Model within the Group and collaterals that the risk function is understood and permeates throughout all the levels of the organization.

1.4.1. Governance and organization

The risk governance model in BBVA is characterized by the strong involvement of its corporate bodies, both in establishing the risk strategy and in the continuous monitoring and supervising of its implementation.

Thus, as explained below, it is the corporate bodies that approve the risk strategy and the corporate policies for the different types of risks. The risk function is responsible within the scope of its management for implementing and developing the risk strategy, being answerable for it to the corporate bodies.

The responsibility for the day-to-day management of risks corresponds to the businesses, which engage in their business following the policies, rules, procedures, infrastructures and controls that are based on the framework set by the company bodies and defined by the risk function.

To carry out this work adequately, the risk function in the BBVA Group has been set up as a single, global function that is independent of the commercial areas.

1.4.1.1.  Corporate governance layout

The BBVA Group has developed a system of corporate governance that is in line with the best international practices and adapted it to the requirements of the regulators in the country in which its different units operate.

The Board of Directors (hereinafter “the Board) approves the risk strategy and supervises the internal control and management systems. Specifically, the strategy approved by the Board includes at least the statement of the Group’s Risk Appetite, the fundamental metrics and the basic structure of limits by geographical areas, risk types and asset classes, as well as the bases of the risk control and management Model. The Board also ensures that the budget is aligned with the approved Risk Appetite.

On the basis established by the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee approves the specific corporate policies for each type of risk. In addition, this committee approves the Group’s risk limits and monitors them. It is informed both of the overruns of the limits and of any appropriate corrective measures that have been taken.

Finally, the Board of Directors has created a specialized committee for risks, the Risks Committee (RC). This committee analyzes and monitors risk periodically in the area of the attributions of the corporate bodies, and assists the Board of Directors and the Executive Committee in determining and monitoring the risk strategy and corporate policy strategy, respectively. Among its most important work is detailed control and monitoring of the risks affecting the Group overall, which allows it to ensure that the risk strategy is effectively integrated into management and the corporate policies approved by the corporate bodies are applied.

Page 27

The head of the risk function in the executive line, the Corporate Risk Officer (CRO) carries out his work with the independence, authority, rank and resources required. He is appointed by the Bank’s Board of Directors, as a member of its senior management, and has direct access to its corporate bodies (the Board of Directors, the Executive Committee and the Risks Committee), to which he reports regularly on the risk situation in the Group.

To perform his functions better, the CRO is supported by a structure made up of cross-cutting risk units in the corporate area and specific risk units in the Group’s geographical and/or business areas. Each of these units has its own Risk Manager in charge of the geographical and/or business areas, who within the scope of his competence, carries out the functions of risk management and control and is responsible for applying the corporate policies and rules approved at Group level consistently, while adapting them if necessary to local requirements and reporting these matters to the local corporate bodies.

The Risk Managers of the geographical and/or business areas answer to both the CRO and the head of the geographical and/or business area. This system of co-dependence aims to ensure the interdependence of the local risk function from the operational functions, and allows them to be aligned with the Group’s corporate policies and objectives with respect to risks.

Finally, the Group’s policy on the selection of directors is contained in the selection procedure described in the Annual Corporate Governance Report. This procedure takes into account aspects such as diversity on the Board. The Appointments Committee is responsible for presenting to the Board the policy relating to diversity and the gender representation targets on the Board at all levels.

1.4.1.2.  Organizational and committee structure

As mentioned above, the risk function is composed of the corporate area risk units, which carry out cross-cutting functions, and the risk units of the geographical and/or business areas.

• The corporate area risk units develop and submit to the Corporate Risk Officer (CRO) the proposal for the Group’s Risk Appetite, the corporate policies, rules, procedures and global infrastructures within the framework of action approved by the corporate bodies; they ensure their correct application and report directly or through the CRO to the Bank’s corporate bodies. Among their functions are:

• Management of the different types of risks at Group level, in accordance with the strategy defined by the corporate bodies.

• Planning of risks in line with the Risk Appetite principles.

• Monitoring and control of the Group’s risk profile in relation to the Risk Appetite approved by the Bank’s corporate bodies, providing precise and reliable information with the frequency and in the format required.

• Carrying out prospective analyses that can evaluate compliance with the Risk Appetite in stress scenarios and analyze the mechanisms for mitigating the effect.

• Management of the technological and methodological developments required for development of the Model in the Group.

• Articulating Group’s Internal Risk Control model and defining the methodology, corporate criteria and procedures to identify and prioritize the risk inherent to each unit’s activities and processes.

• Validation of the models used and the results obtained by them to verify whether they are appropriate to the different uses to which they are applied.

Page 28

• The risks units in the business areas develop and submit to the Risk Manager of the geographical and/or business area the proposed Risk Appetite applicable in each geographical and/or business area, with autonomy and always within the Group’s Risk Appetite. At the same time, they ensure that the approved corporate policies and rules are applied consistently at Group level, adapting them where appropriate to local requirements; they are provided with the adequate infrastructures for the control and management of their risks and report, where appropriate, to the corporate bodies and senior management.

Thus the local risk units work with the corporate risk units with the aim of adapting to the risk strategy at Group level and pooling all the information necessary to monitor changes in risks.

The risk function’s decision-making process is based on a committee structure. The global steering committee of the risk area is the main committee in the risk function. It proposes, checks, and approves, where appropriate, items such as the internal regulatory framework for risks, the procedures and infrastructures needed to identify, evaluate, measure and manage the risks faced by the Group in carrying out its business, and the admission of the operations with the most relevant risks. The members of this Committee are the CRO and the heads of the risk units of the corporate area and the most representative geographical and/or business areas.

The Global Risk Management Committee (GRMC) operates through various support committees, including the following:

• Global Technical Operations Committee: Its aim is to take decisions related to wholesale credit risk admission from certain customer segments.

• Monitoring, Assessment & Reporting Committee: Collaterals the existence and proper development of the aspects relating to the identification, evaluation, monitoring and reporting of risks, with a comprehensive and transversal approach.

• Asset Allocation Committee: An executive body for analysis and decision-making on all those issues related to credit risks that are linked to the processes designed to obtain a balance between risk and profitability in accordance with the Group’s Risk Appetite.

• Technology and Methodologies Committee: Its aim is to determine the need for new models and infrastructures and to channel decision-making related to the tools required to manage all the risks to which the Group is exposed.

• Corporate Technological Risks and Operational Control Committee: The aim is to approve the Technological Risk Management and Operational Control Frameworks, in accordance with the General Risk Model, and monitor the metrics, risk profiles and operational loss events.

• Global Market Risk Unit Committee: The aim is to formalize, supervise and communicate the monitoring of trading risk in all the Global Markets business units.

• Corporate Operational Risk Admission and Outsourcing Committee: Identification and evaluation of the operational risks of new businesses, new products and services and outsourcing initiatives.

Each geographical and/or business area has its own risk management committee (or committees), with objectives and content similar to those of the corporate area, which develop their functions consistently and in line with the corporate policies and regulations on risks.

Within this organizational scheme, the risk function ensures the integration and application across the whole Group of a consistent risk strategy, regulatory framework, infrastructures and risk controls, while benefiting from customer insight and the proximity of each geographical and/or business area and transmitting the corporate culture on this matter to the Group’s different organizational levels.

Page 29

1.4.1.3.  Internal Risk Control and Internal Validation

The Group has a specific Internal Risk Control unit. Its main function is to ensure there is a sufficient internal regulatory framework, a process and measures defined for each type of risk identified in the Group (and for those other types of risk for which the Group may be potentially affected). It controls their application and operation, as well as ensuring the integration of the risk strategy into the Group’s management. The Internal Risk Control unit is independent of the units that develop the risk models, manage processes and execute controls. Its scope of action is global, from the geographical point of view and the type of risks.

The Group’s Internal Risk Control Director is responsible for the function; he reports its activities and informs the CRO and the Board’s Risks Committee of its work plans, as well as assisting the Board on such matters as it requires.

For these purposes the Risks area also has a Technical Secretary’s Office, which is also independent of the units that develop the risk models, manage the processes and execute the controls. The Technical Secretary’s Office offers the Committee the technical support it needs to perform its duties better.

The unit has a structure of teams at both corporate level and in the most relevant geographical areas in which the Group operates. As in the case of the Corporate Area, local units are independent of the business areas that execute the processes, and of the units that execute the controls, and report functionally to the Internal Risk Control unit. This unit’s lines of action are established at Group level, and it is responsible for adapting and executing them locally, as well as for reporting the most relevant aspects.

In addition, the Group has an Internal Validation unit, which is also independent of the units that develop the risk models and of those that use them in management. Its functions include revision and independent validation at internal level of the models used for the control and management of risks in the Group.

The BBVA Group’s internal control system is based on the best practices developed in “Enterprise Risk Management – Integrated Framework” by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) as well as in the “Framework for Internal Control Systems in Banking Organizations” by the Bank for International Settlements (BIS).

The control model has a system with three lines of defense:

• The first line is made up of the Group’s business units, which are responsible for control within their area and for executing any measures established by higher management levels.

• The second line consists of the specialized control units (Legal Compliance, Global Accounting & Informational Management/Internal Financial Control, Internal Risk Control, IT Risk, Fraud & Security, Operations Control and the Production Divisions of the support units, such as Human Resources, Legal Services, etc.). This line supervises the control of the various units within their cross-cutting field of expertise, defines the necessary improvement and mitigating measures, and promotes their proper implementation. The Corporate Operational Risk Management unit also forms part of this line, providing a methodology and common management tools.

• The third line is the Internal Audit unit, which conducts an independent review of the model, verifying the effectiveness and compliance with corporate policies and providing independent information on the control model.

1.4.2. Risk Appetite

The Group’s Risk Appetite as approved by the Board of Directors determines the risks and their level that the Group is prepared to assume to achieve its business objectives. These risks are expressed in terms of capital, liquidity, profitability, recurring revenue, cost of risk and other metrics. The determination of Risk Appetite has the following objectives:

• Make explicit the Group’s strategy and the maximum levels of risk that the Group is prepared to assume, both at Group level and at geographical and/or business level.

Page 30

• Establish guidelines for action and a management framework for the medium-long term that prevents actions (both at Group and geographical and/or business level) that may compromise the Group’s future viability.

• Establish a framework for relating with the geographical and/or business areas, that preserves their decision-making autonomy while ensuring their consistent performance and preventing divergent behavior.

• Establish a common language across the whole organization and develop a risk culture geared toward compliance with it.

• Alignment with the new regulatory requirements, making communication with regulators, investors and other stakeholders easier, thanks to an integrated and stable risk management framework.

Risk Appetite is manifested through the following elements:

• The Risk Appetite Statement: It includes the general principles of the Group’s risk strategy and the target risk profile.

• BBVA’s risk policy is aimed at maintaining the risk profile made explicit in the Group’s Risk Appetite Statement, which is manifested in a series of metrics that approximate it (Fundamental Metrics and Limits).

• Fundamental Metrics: They set out in quantitative terms the principles and target risk profile included in the Risk Appetite statement.

• Limits: They provide a structure for the Risk Appetite at the level of the geographical and/or business areas, legal entities, risk types, or any others that are considered appropriate, allowing them to be integrated into management.

The corporate risks area works with the different geographical and/or business areas to define their Risk Appetite so that it is coordinated across the group and to ensure that the profile is in line with the definition.

The BBVA Group assumes a certain level of risk in order to provide financial services and products for its customers and obtain attractive levels of return for shareholders. The organization has to understand, manage and control the risks it assumes.

The aim of the organization is not to eliminate all risks, but to assume a prudent level of risks that allows it to generate returns while maintaining acceptable capital and fund levels and generating recurrent earnings.

BBVA’s Risk Appetite expresses the levels and types of risk that the Bank is prepared to assume to carry out its strategic plan without significant deviations, even in situations of tension. The Risk Appetite is integrated into management and determines the basic lines of the Group’s activity, as it establishes the framework within which the budgeting process is developed.

Page 31

CHART 2: Risk Appetite

1.4.2.1. Basic Metrics

These are the metrics that characterize the entity’s objective behavior (defined in the statement), allowing an expression of the risk culture at all levels in a systematic and comprehensible way. They synthesize the entity’s objectives and so they are useful for communicating with the stakeholders.

The basic metrics are strategic, propagated across the whole Group, comprehensible and easy to calculate, objectifiable at the business/geographical area level and subject to future projections.

1.4.2.2. Limits

Metrics that determine the strategic positioning of the entity for the different types of risk: structural (Asset & Liability Management, ALM), liquidity, markets, operations, etc. The following aspects differentiate it from the Basic Metrics:

1. They are levers for achieving the result: They are a management tool that responds to a strategic positioning and that must be aimed at allowing compliance with the Fundamental Metrics, even under adverse scenarios.

2. Risk metrics: A greater level of specialization. They do not necessarily have to be used across the whole Group.

3. Independent of the cycle: May include metrics with a limited correlation with the economic cycle, allowing comparability that is isolated from the specific macroeconomic situation.

They are therefore levers for remaining within the thresholds defined in the fundamental metrics and used to manage day-to-day risk. They include tolerance limits, sublimits and alerts established at the business/geographical, portfolio, product, etc. level.

In 2014 the Risk Appetite metrics changed in line with the established profile.

Page 32

1.4.3.  Decisions and processes

The transfer of Risk Appetite to ordinary management is supported by three basic aspects:

• A standard body of regulations

• Risk planning

• Integrated risk management throughout their life cycle

1.4.3.1.  A uniform body of regulations

The corporate GRM area is responsible for defining and developing corporate policies, specific regulations, procedures and schemes for delegation according to which the risk decisions have to be adopted within the Group

The process of creation, standardization and integration into management of corporate rules and regulations is called regulatory standardization.

This process aims for the following objectives:

• Hierarchy and structure: Information that is well structured through a clear and simple hierarchy that allows dependent documents to be related to each other.

• Simplicity: An adequate and sufficient number of documents.

• Uniformity: Uniform number and content of documents.

• Accessibility: Easy search and access to documentation through the Corporate Risk Management Library.

The approval of corporate policies for all kinds of risks corresponds to the Bank’s corporate bodies, while the corporate risk area approves the rest of the regulations.

The risk units of the geographical and/or business areas comply with this body of regulations and, where necessary, adapt it to local requirements, in order to have a decision-making process that is appropriate to the local level and in line with the Group’s policies. If such adaptation is necessary, the local risks area must inform the corporate GRM area, which has to ensure consistency in the body of regulations at Group level. Where appropriate, it must thus give its prior approval to the modifications proposed by the local risk areas.

1.4.3.2.  Risk planning

Risk planning ensures integration in Risk Appetite management through a cascade process of establishing limits, where the function of corporate area and geographical and/or business area risk units is to collateral this process is aligned with the Group’s Risk Appetite.

It has the tools available to align and monitor the Risk Appetite defined at aggregate level by: business areas, legal entities, types of risk, concentrations and any other level that may be considered necessary.

The process of risk planning is present within the rest of the Group’s planning framework to ensure the coherence of all the other processes.

Page 33

1.4.3.3.  Day-to-day risk management

All risks must be managed in an integrated fashion during their life cycle, based on differentiated treatment according to their type.

The risk management cycle is made up of 5 elements:

• Planning: Its aim is to ensure the Group’s activities are consistent with the objective risk profile and to collateral solvency in carrying out the strategy.

• Evaluation: A process focused on identifying all the risks inherent in the activities carried out by the Group.

• Formalization: Includes the phases of origination, approval and formalization of the risk.

• Monitoring and Reporting: Continuous and structured risk monitoring, and preparation of reports for internal and/or external consumption (market, investors, etc.).

• Active portfolio management: Focused on identifying business opportunities, in both existing portfolios and in new markets, businesses or products.

1.4.4. Evaluation, monitoring and reporting

Evaluation, monitoring and reporting is a cross-cutting element that has to ensure that the Model has a dynamic and anticipatory vision, making possible compliance with the Risk Appetite approved by the corporate bodies, even under unfavorable scenarios. This process covers all the material risk categories and has the following objectives:

• Evaluate compliance of the Risk Appetite at the present time, through monitoring of the fundamental metrics and limits.

• Evaluate compliance of the Risk Appetite in the future through projection of the Risk Appetite variables, both in a baseline scenario determined by the budget, and in a specific risk scenario determined by stress tests.

• Identify and value the risk factors and scenarios that may compromise compliance of the Risk Appetite through the development of a repository of risks and an analysis of their impact.

• Act to mitigate the impact on the Group of the risk factors and scenarios identified, ensuring the risk remains within the target risk profile.

• Monitor the key variables that directly do not form part of Risk Appetite, but that condition its compliance. These may be both external and internal.

The following phases have to be developed to carry out this process:

• Identification of the risk factors, which has the aim of generating a map with the most relevant risk factors that could compromise the Group’s performance with respect to the thresholds defined in the Risk Appetite.

• Evaluation of the impact: Consists of evaluating what impact the materialization of one or more risk factors identified in the previous phase could have on the Risk Appetite metrics, if a given scenario occurs.

• Response to undesirable situations and proposed measures for adjusting the situation: The overruns of the thresholds will be associated with an analysis of the measures for adjustments at the corresponding level that allow a dynamic management of the situation, even before it takes place.

Page 34

• Monitoring: Aims to avoid ex ante losses through supervision of the Group’s current risk profile and the risk factors identified.

• Reporting: Aims to give information on the risk profile assumed, offering precise, complete and reliable data to the corporate bodies and senior management with the frequency and detail required by the nature, importance and complexity of the risks.

1.4.5. Infrastructure

Infrastructure constitutes the element that must ensure that the Group has the human and technological resources required for effective management and supervision of risks, performance of the functions included in the Group’s risk Model, and achievement of its objectives.

With respect to human resources, the Group’s risk function must have an adequate workforce in terms of number, skills and experience.

With respect to technology, the Group ensures the integrity of the management information systems and the provision of the infrastructure required to support risk management, including the tools appropriate to the needs derived from the different types of risks in their admission, management, valuation and monitoring.

The principles according to which the Group’s risk technology is governed are:

• Uniformity: The criteria are consistent across the whole Group, ensuring the same risk treatment at each geographical and/or business level.

• Integration in the management: The tools incorporate the corporate risk policies and are applied to the Group’s day-to-day management.

• Automation of the main processes that compose the risk management cycle.

• Adequacy: Adequate supply of information at the appropriate time.

Through the Risk Analytics function, the Group has a corporate framework that develops measurement techniques and models, covering all the types of risk and the different purposes, and involves a uniform language for all the activities and geographical/business areas.

The execution is decentralized, allowing the Group’s global scope to be used to the full. The idea is to develop the existing risk models continuously and generate others that cover the new range of businesses that are being deployed, with the aim of strengthening anticipation and proactiveness that characterize the risk function in the Group.

Equally, the risk units of the geographical and/or business areas must ensure they have sufficient means from the point of view of resources, structures and tools to develop risk management in accordance with the corporate model.

Page 35

1.4.6. Risk culture

BBVA considers risk culture as an essential element for the consolidation and integration of the other components of the Model. The culture transfers to all the levels of the organization the implications involved in the Group’s activities and businesses from the perspective of risk. The risk culture is based on a number of levers, including:

• Communication: Promotes the spread of the Model, and particularly the principles that should govern risk management in the Group consistently and comprehensively across the organization, through the most appropriate channels.

GRM has a variety of channels for communication that facilitate the transfer of information and knowledge between the different teams in the function and the Group, adapting the frequency, formats and recipients according to the objective set, making it easier to establish the basic principles of the risk function. Thus the culture of risks and the prudent management model begin with the corporate bodies and the Group’s management and are transmitted across the whole organization.

• Training: The main aim is to spread and consolidate the prudent risk management model across the organization, ensuring standards in skills and knowledge in those involved in the risk management processes.

A well-defined and implemented system of training ensures the continuous improvement of the skills and knowledge of the Group’s professionals, and in particular those in the GRM area. It is organized into four vectors that aim to develop each of the requirements of the GRM group by providing in-depth knowledge and skills in various subjects, such as: finance and risks, tools and technology, management and expertise, and languages.

• Motivation: An area where the aim is for the incentives of the teams in the risk function to support the risk management strategy, values and culture of the function at all levels. It includes remuneration, and all the other elements associated with motivation, such as the working environment, etc. that contribute to achieving the Model’s objectives.

1.5. Scope and nature of the risk measurement and reporting systems

Depending on their type, risks fall into the following categories:

• Credit Risk.

• Market Risk.

• Operational Risk.

• Structural Risks.

• Liquidity Risk

There follows a description of the risk measurement systems and tools for each kind of risk.

Page 36

1.5.1. Credit risk

Credit risk arises from the probability that one party to a financial instrument will fail to meet its contractual obligations for reasons of insolvency or inability to pay and cause a financial loss for the other party. This includes management of counterparty risk, issuer credit risk, liquidation risk and country risk.

BBVA quantifies its credit risk using two main metrics: expected loss (EL) and economic capital (EC). The expected loss reflects the average value of losses and is considered a business cost. Economic capital is the amount of capital considered necessary to cover unexpected losses if actual losses are greater than expected losses.

These risk metrics are combined with information on profitability in value-based management, thus building the profitability-risk binomial into decision-making, from the definition of business strategy to approval of individual loans, price setting, assessment of non-performing portfolios, incentives to areas in the Group, etc.

There are three essential parameters in the process of calculating the EL and EC measurements: the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and exposure at default (EAD). These are generally estimated using historical information available in the systems. They are assigned to operations and customers according to their characteristics. In this context, the credit rating tools (ratings and scorings) assess the risk in each transaction/customer according to their credit quality by assigning them a score, which is used in assigning risk metrics together with other additional information: transaction seasoning, loan to value ratio, customer segment, etc.

Point 4.5.1.7 of this document details the definitions, methods and data used by the Group to determine the capital requirements for estimating and validating the parameters of probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and exposure at default (EAD).

The credit risk for the BBVA Group’s global portfolio is measured through a Portfolio Model that includes the effects of concentration and diversification. The aim is to study the loan book as a whole, and to analyze and capture the effect of the interrelations between the different portfolios.

In addition to enabling a more comprehensive calculation of economic capital needs, this model is a key tool for credit risk management, as it establishes loan limits based on the contribution of each unit to total risk in a global, diversified setting.

The Portfolio Model considers that risk comes from various sources (it is a multi-factor model). This feature implies that economic capital is sensitive to geographic diversification, a crucial aspect in a global entity like BBVA. These effects have been made more apparent against the current backdrop in which, despite the stress undergone by some economies, the BBVA Group’s presence in different geographical areas, subject to different shocks and different moments in the cycle, have contributed to bolster the bank’s solvency. In addition, the tool is sensitive to concentration in certain credit exposures of the entity’s large clients.

Lastly, the results of the Portfolio Model are integrated into management within the framework of the Asset Allocation project, where business concentrations are analyzed in order to establish the entity’s risk profile.

The analysis of the entity’s RWA structure shows that 84% corresponds to Credit Risk.

(See Chapter 4 “Credit risk”).

Page 37

1.5.2. Market risk

Market risk originates in the possibility that there may be losses in the value of positions held due to movements in the market variables that affect the valuation of financial products and assets in trading activity.

The main risks generated may be classified into the following groups:

• Interest-rate risk: They arise as a result of exposure to the movement in the different interest-rate curves on which there is trading. Although the typical products generating sensitivity to movements in interest rates are money market products (deposits, futures on interest rates, call money swaps, etc.) and the traditional interest-rate derivatives (swaps, interest-rate options such as caps, floors, swaptions, etc.), practically all the financial products have some exposure to movements in interest rates due to the effect of the financial discount in valuing them.

• Equity Risk: Arises as a result of movements in the price of shares. This risk is generated in the spot share price positions, as well as any derivative product whose underlying is a share or equity index. Dividend risk is a sub-risk of equity risk, as an input of any equity option. Its variability may affect the valuation of positions and thus it is a factor that generates risk on the books.

• Currency risk: It occurs due to a movement in the exchange rates of the currencies in which the position is held. As in the case of equity risk, this risk is generated in the spot foreign-currency positions, as well as any derivative product whose underlying is an exchange rate.

In addition, the quanto effect (transactions where the underlying and the nominal of the transaction are denominated in different currencies) means that in certain transactions where the underlying is not a currency an exchange-rate risk is generated that has to be measured and monitored.

• Credit-spread risk: Credit spread is a market indicator of the credit quality of an issuer. The spread risk takes place due to variations in the levels of spread in corporate or government issuers and affects both bond and credit derivative positions.

• Volatility risk: This occurs as a result of variations in the levels of implied volatility in the price of different market instruments in which derivatives are traded. This risk, unlike the others, is exclusively a component of derivative transactions and is defined as a risk of first-order convexity that is generated in all the possible underlyings where there are products with an optionality that require a volatility input for their valuation.

The metrics developed for the control and monitoring of market risk in BBVA Group are aligned with the best market practices and implemented consistently in all the local market risk units. The standard metric for measuring market risk is Value at Risk (VaR), which indicates the maximum losses that may be incurred in the portfolios at a given confidence level (99%) and time horizon (one day).

Chapter 5.2 explains in more detail the risk measurement models used in BBVA Group, focused on internal models approved by the Bank of Spain for BBVA S.A. and BBVA Bancomer for the purpose of calculating the capital for positions in the trading portfolio. Both entities contribute around 80% of the market risk of the Group’s trading portfolio. For the rest of the geographical areas (South America and Compass), the calculation of capital for the risk positions in the trading portfolio is carried out using the standard model.

The analysis of the entity’s RWA structure shows that 3% corresponds to Market Risk.

(See Chapter 5 “Market risk in trading book activities”).

Page 38

1.5.3. Operational risk

Operational risk is defined as the one that could potentially cause losses due to human errors, inadequate or faulty internal processes, system failures or external events. This definition includes legal risk, but excludes strategic and/or business risk and reputational risk.

Operational risk is inherent to all banking activities, products, systems and processes. Its origins are diverse (processes, internal and external fraud, technology, human resources, commercial practices, disasters and suppliers). Operational risk management is integrated into the BBVA Group’s global risk management structure.

The analysis of the entity’s RWA structure shows that 9% corresponds to Operational Risk.

(See Chapter 6 “Operational Risk”).

1.5.4. Structural risks

Below is a description of the different types of structural risk:

1.5.4.1.  Structural interest rate risk.

The aim of managing balance-sheet interest rate risk is to maintain the BBVA Group’s exposure to variations in interest rates at levels in line with its strategy and target risk profile.

Movements in interest rates lead to changes in a bank’s net interest income and book value, and constitute a key source of asset and liability interest-rate risk.

The extent of these impacts will depend on the bank’s exposure to changes in interest rates. This exposure is mainly the result of the time difference between the different maturity and repricing terms of the assets and liabilities on the banking book and the off-balance-sheet positions.

A financial institution’s exposure to adverse changes in market rates is a risk inherent in the banking business, while at the same time representing an opportunity to generate value. That is why the structural interest rate should be managed effectively and have a reasonable relation both to the bank’s capital base and the expected economic result. This function is handled by the Balance-Sheet Management unit, within the Financial Management area. Through the Asset and Liability Committee (ALCO) it is in charge of maximizing the Bank’s economic value, preserving the net interest income and collateraling the generation of recurrent earnings. In pursuance of this, the ALCO develops strategies based on its market expectations, within the risk profile defined by the BBVA Group’s management bodies and balance the expected results and the level of risk assumed. BBVA has a transfer pricing system that centralizes its interest-rate risk on ALCO’s books and helps to ensure that balance-sheet risk is being properly managed.

The corporate GRM area is responsible for controlling and monitoring structural interest-rate risk, acting as an independent unit to collateral that the risk management and control functions are properly segregated. This policy is in line with the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision recommendations. It constructs the asset and liability interest-rate risk measurements used by the Group’s management, as well as designing models and measurement systems and developing monitoring, information and control systems. At the same time, the Global Risk Management Committee (GRMC) carries out the function of risk control and analysis reporting to the main governing bodies, such as the Executive Committee and the Board of Director’s Risk Committee.

Page 39

BBVA’s structural interest-rate risk management procedure has a sophisticated set of metrics and tools that enable its risk profile to be monitored precisely. This model is based on a carefully studied set of hypotheses which aim to characterize the behavior of the balance sheet exactly. The measurement of interest-rate risk includes probabilistic metrics, as well as a calculation of sensitivity to a parallel movement of +/- 100 basis points in the market curves.

There is regular measurement of the Bank’s earnings at risk (EaR) and economic capital, defined as the maximum adverse deviations in net interest income and economic value, respectively, for a particular confidence level and time horizon.

The deviations are obtained by applying a method for simulating interest-rate curves that takes into account other sources of risk in addition to changes in direction, such as changes in the slope and curvature, as well as considering the diversification between currencies and business units. The model is subject to regular internal validation, which includes backtesting.

The risk measurement model is supplemented by analysis of specific scenarios and stress tests. Stress tests have taken on particular importance in recent years. Stress testing has become particularly important in recent years, so a greater emphasis has been placed on the analysis of extreme scenarios in a possible breakthrough in both current interest-rate levels and historical correlations and volatility. At the same time, the evaluation of scenarios forecast by the Economic Research Department has been maintained.

1.5.4.2.  Structural exchange rate risk.

This risk is basically caused by exposure to variations in currency exchange rates that arise in the BBVA Group’s foreign subsidiaries and the provision of funds to foreign branches financed in a different currency to that of the investment. The BBVA Group’s structural exchange-rate risk management aims to minimize the potential negative impact from fluctuations in exchange rates on the solvency ratios and on the contribution to earnings of international investments maintained on a permanent basis by the Group.

The GRM corporate area acts as an independent unit that is responsible for monitoring and analyzing risks, standardizing risk management metrics and providing tools that can anticipate potential deviations from targets. It also monitors the level of compliance of established risk limits, and reports regularly to the Global Risk Management Committee (GRMC), the Board of Directors’ Risks Committee and the Executive Committee, particularly in the case of deviation or tension in the levels of risk assumed.

The Balance Sheet Management unit, through ALCO, designs and executes the hedging strategies with the main purpose of minimizing the effect of exchange-rate fluctuations on capital ratios, as well as assuring the equivalent value in euros of the foreign-currency earnings of the Group’s subsidiaries, adjusting transactions according to market expectations and hedging costs. The Balance-Sheet Management area carries out this work by ensuring that the Group’s risk profile is at all times adapted to the framework defined by the limits structure authorized by the Executive Committee. To do so, it uses risk metrics obtained according to the corporate model designed by the Global Risk Management area.

Page 40

The corporate measurement model uses an exchange rate scenario simulation which, based on historical changes, quantifies possible changes in value for a given confidence interval and a pre-established time horizon, assessing the impacts in three management areas: in the capital ratio, equity and the Group’s income statement. The calculation of risk estimates takes into account the risk mitigation measures aimed at reducing the exchange-rate risk exposure. The diversification resulting from investments in different geographical areas is also considered.

In addition to monitoring in terms of exposure and sensitivity to the different currencies, risk control and management are based on probabilistic metrics that estimate maximum impacts for different confidence levels in each area, for which limits and alerts are set according to the tolerance levels established by the Group. Structural exchange-rate risk control is completed with the analysis of marginal contributions to currency risk, the diversification effects, the effectiveness of hedging, and scenario and stress analysis. This provides a complete overview of the Group’s exposure to this risk.

Below is a visual display of the changes in the main currencies that make up the Group’s structural exchange-rate risk and that explain the trends in the exposure and RWAs of foreign companies due to the effect of changing currency prices.

CHART 3: Trends in the main currencies comprising the Group’s exposure to structural exchange-rate risk

Page 41

TABLE 5: Trends in the main currencies comprising the Group’s exposure to structural exchange-rate risk

Month		USD				VEF				TRY				MXN				PEN
dic-13			1.379				8.677				2.960				18.073				3.853
ene-14			1.352				15.354				3.074				18.161				3.813
feb-14			1.381				16.299				3.055				18.309				3.863
mar-14			1.379				14.753				2.969				18.015				3.872
abr-14			1.385				13.850				2.933				18.153				3.886
may-14			1.361				13.607				2.850				17.483				3.764
jun-14			1.366				14.477				2.897				17.712				3.813
jul-14			1.338				14.717				2.855				17.635				3.739
ago-14			1.319				15.166				2.851				17.266				3.751
sep-14			1.258				15.100				2.878				16.998				3.638
oct-14			1.252				15.029				2.777				16.871				3.661
nov-14			1.248				14.980				2.759				17.271				3.645
dic-14			1.214				14.569				2.832				17.868				3.614
Average Rate			1.321				14.825				2.894				17.645				3.755
Annual % change			-11.96	%			67.90	%			-4.34	%			-1.13	%			-6.20	%

As can be seen above, the euro has depreciated in general against the rest of the currencies, except for the Venezuelan bolivar. This generates an increase in exposure and RWAs referenced to the USD, MXN, TRY and PEN and a notable reduction in exposures and RWAs with respect to the Venezuelan bolivar. The result is that in the standard credit risk the net final effect is a slight fall.

Finally, it should be noted that the specific capital requirements for exchange-rate risk have fallen by €48 million with respect to 2013 (from €780 million to €732 million, as can be seen in section 3.1 of this document).

This change has been the result of the fall in operating positions, mainly in Mexican pesos, dollars and Turkish lira, which have offset the increase in the Chinese yuan, as well as the greater market value of BBVA’s stake in CNCB.

1.5.4.3.  Structural risk in the equity portfolio.

The BBVA Group’s exposure to structural risk in the equity portfolio basically results from the holdings in industrial and financial companies, with medium/long-term investment horizons. It includes the holdings consolidated in the Group, although their variations in value have no immediate effect on equity in this case.

This exposure is mitigated through net short positions held in derivatives on their underlying assets, which are used to limit portfolio sensitivity to potential falls in prices.

The GRM corporate area acts as an independent unit that is responsible for monitoring and analyzing risks, standardizing risk management metrics and providing tools that can anticipate potential deviations from targets.

It also monitors the level of compliance with the limits set, according to the Risk Appetite and as authorized by the Executive Committee. It reports on these levels regularly to the Global Risk Management Committee (GRMC), the Board’s Risk Committee and the Executive Committee, particularly in the case of significant levels of risk assumed, in line with the current corporate policy.

Page 42

The mechanisms of risk control and limitation hinge on the key aspects of exposure, earnings and economic capital. The structural equity risk management metrics designed by GRM according to the corporate model contribute to effective risk monitoring by estimating the sensitivity figures and the capital needed to cover possible unexpected losses due to the variations in the value of the companies making up the Group’s equity portfolio, at a confidence level that corresponds to the institution’s target rating, and taking into account the liquidity of the positions and the statistical performance of the assets under consideration. To carry out a more in-depth analysis, stress tests and sensitivity analyses are carried out from time to time against different simulated scenarios, using both past crisis situations and forecasts by BBVA Research as the base. On a monthly basis, backtesting is carried out on the risk measurement model used.

1.5.5. Liquidity risk.

Liquidity and funding risk management aims to ensure in the short term that a bank does not have any difficulties in duly meeting its payment commitments, and that it does not have to resort to funding under burdensome terms which may harm the bank’s image or reputation.

In the medium term the aim is to ensure that the Group’s financing structure is ideal and that it is moving in the right direction with respect to the economic situation, the markets and regulatory changes. Management of structural funding and short-term liquidity is decentralized in BBVA Group.

Management of structural funding and liquidity within the BBVA Group is based on the principle of financial self-sufficiency of the entities that make it up. This approach helps prevent and limit liquidity risk by reducing the Group’s vulnerability during periods of high risk. This decentralized management prevents possible contagion from a crisis affecting only one or a few BBVA Group entities, which must act independently to meet their liquidity requirements in the markets where they operate. As regards liquidity and funding management, the BBVA Group is organized around eleven Liquidity Management Units (UGL) made up of the parent company and the banking subsidiaries in each geographical area, plus their dependent branches, even when these branches raise funding in different currencies.

One of the objectives of the BBVA Group’s principle of financial self-sufficiency of liquidity management in the subsidiaries is to ensure that price formation reflects the cost of liquidity correctly. That is why each entity holds explicit assets available for the management of liquidity at individual level, whether Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria S.A. or its subsidiaries.

The only exception to this principle is Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria (Portugal), S.A., which is financed by Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria, S.A. Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria (Portugal), S.A. represented 0.8% of total consolidated assets and 0.5% of total consolidated liabilities as of December 31, 2014.

The BBVA Group’s policy for managing liquidity and funding risk is also the basis of the model’s robustness in terms of planning and integration of risk management into the budgeting process of each UGL, according to the appetite for funding risk it decides to assume in its business. In order to implement this principle of anticipation, limits are set on an annual basis for the main management metrics that form part of the budgeting process for the liquidity balance. This framework of limits contributes to the planning of the joint evolutionary performance of:

• The loan book, considering the types of assets and their degree of liquidity, a well as their validity as collateral in collateralized funding.

Page 43

• Stable customer funds, based on the application of a methodology for establishing which segments and customer balances are considered to be stable or volatile funds based on the principle of sustainability and recurrence of these funds.

• The credit gap projection, in order to require a degree of self-funding that is defined in terms of the difference between the loan-book and stable customer funds.

• Incorporating the planning of securities portfolios into the banking book, which include both fixed-interest and equity securities, and are classified as available-for-sale or held-to-maturity portfolios, and additionally on trading portfolios.

• The structural gap projection, as a result of assessing the funding needs generated both from the credit gap and by the securities portfolio in the banking book, together with the rest of on-balance-sheet wholesale funding needs, excluding trading portfolios. This gap therefore needs to be funded with customer funds that are not considered stable or on wholesale markets.

As a result of these funding needs, the BBVA Group plans in each UGL the target wholesale funding structure according to the tolerance set. Thus, once the structural gap has been identified and after resorting to wholesale markets, the amount and composition of wholesale structural funding is established in subsequent years, in order to maintain a diversified funding mix and collateral that there is not a high reliance on short-term funding (short-term wholesale funding plus volatile customer funds).

In practice, the execution of the principles of planning and self-funding at the different UGLs results in the Group’s main source of funding being customer deposits, which consist mainly of demand deposits, savings deposits and time deposits. As sources of funding, customer deposits are complemented by access to the interbank market and the domestic and international capital markets in order to address additional liquidity requirements, implementing domestic and international programs for the issuance of commercial paper and medium and long-term debt.

(See Chapter 9 “Liquidity and funding risk”).

1.6. Risk protection and reduction policies. Supervision strategies and processes

In most cases, maximum exposure to credit risk is reduced by collateral, credit enhancements and other actions which mitigate the Group’s exposure. The Group applies a credit risk protection and mitigation policy deriving from its business model focused on relationship banking.

On this basis, the provision of collaterals may be a necessary instrument but one that is not sufficient when taking risks; this is because for the Group to assume risks, it needs to verify the payment or resource generation capacity to comply with repayment of the risk incurred under the agreed conditions.

This is carried out through a prudent risk management policy which involves analyzing the financial risk in a transaction, based on the repayment or resource generation capacity of the credit receiver, the provision of collaterals -in any of the generally accepted ways (monetary, collateral or personal collaterals and hedging)- appropriate to the risk borne, and lastly on the valuation of the recovery risk (the asset’s liquidity) of the collaterals received.

The procedures for the management and valuation of collateral are set out in the Internal Manuals on Credit Risk Management Policies and Procedures (retail and wholesale), which establish the basic principles for credit risk management, including the management of collateral assigned in transactions with customers.

Page 44

The methods used to value the collateral are in line with the best market practices and imply the use of appraisal of real-estate collateral, the market price in market securities, the trading price of shares in mutual funds, etc. All collateral assigned must be properly drawn up and entered in the corresponding register. They must also have the approval of the Group’s legal units.

The following is a description of the main types of collateral for each financial instrument class:

• Trading book: The collaterals or credit enhancements obtained directly from the issuer or counterparty are implicit in the clauses of the instrument.

• Trading and hedging derivatives: In derivatives, credit risk is minimized through contractual netting agreements, where positive- and negative-value derivatives with the same counterparty are offset for their net balance. There may likewise be other kinds of collaterals, depending on counterparty solvency and the nature of the transaction.

• Other financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss and available-for-sale financial assets: Collaterals or credit enhancements obtained directly from the issuer or counterparty are inherent in the structure of the instrument.

• Loans and receivables:

• Loans and advances to credit institutions: These usually only have the counterparty’s personal collateral.

• Loans and advances to customers: Most of these operations are backed by personal collaterals extended by the counterparty. There may also be collateral to secure loans and advances to customers (such as mortgages, cash collaterals, pledged securities and other collateral), or to obtain other credit enhancements (bonds, hedging, etc.).

• Debt securities: Collaterals or credit enhancements obtained directly from the issuer or counterparty are inherent in the structure of the instrument.

Page 45

2. Information on total eligible capital

Characteristics of the eligible capital

Amount of eligible capital

2.1. Characteristics of the eligible capital

For the purposes of calculating its minimum capital requirements, the Group considers the capital defined in the second part of chapter IV, section I of the Solvency Regulations to be Tier 2 capital. In addition, it considers the deductions to be those defined as such in section II of the above chapter. The distribution of the various component elements of capital and the deductions between basic capital and auxiliary capital are carried out in keeping with the provisions chapter II, sections I and III of the second part of the Solvency Regulations. In addition, the entity considers eligible capital to include the additional Tier 1 capital elements and instruments as defined in Article 51 of the Solvency Regulations, as well as its corresponding deductions under Article 56 as mentioned above.

In line with what is stipulated in the solvency regulation, capital essentially comprises:

• Common equity: This is the Bank’s share capital.

• Share premium.

• Retained profits and undisclosed reserves: These are understood to be those produced and charged to profits when their balance is in credit and those amounts which, without being included on the income statement, must be booked in the “other reserves” account, in keeping with the provisions contained in the Accounting Circular. In application of Rules Eighteen and Fifty-one of the aforementioned Accounting Circular, exchange rate differences will also be classified as reserves. Likewise, valuation adjustments in the coverage of net investments in businesses abroad and the balance of the equity account which contains remuneration accrued on capital instruments will also be included in reserves.

• Minority interests: The holdings representing minority interests, and corresponding to those ordinary shares in the companies belonging to the consolidated group that are fully paid up, excluding the part which is included in revaluation reserves and in valuation adjustments. Earnings net of dividends attributable to these shareholders are also included hereunder.

• Net income for the year, referring to the perimeter of credit institutions and deducting the foreseeable amount corresponding to dividend payments.

Capital is, moreover, adjusted mainly through the following deductions:

• Intangible assets and goodwill.

• Loss carry-forwards (LCFs).

• Valuation adjustments corresponding to the prudential valuation and debt valuation adjustment (DVA).

• Shares or other securities eligible as capital that are held by any consolidated entity in the Group, as well as those held by entities in the economic group itself that are not consolidable.

Page 46

• Finance for third parties with the aim of acquiring shares or other securities eligible as bank capital of the financer or of other institutions in its consolidable group.

• The outstanding debit balance of each of the total equity accounts that reflect valuation adjustments in available-for-sale financial assets and exchange-rate variations.

• The valuation adjustments corresponding to defined-benefit plans.

• Shortfall of provisions, if any, for the expected loss in positions calculated according to the model based on internal ratings, as well as the amount of securitizations that receive a risk weighting of 1.250%, as indicated by Article 36.1.k.ii of the CRR.

The application of some of the above deductions (mainly intangible assets and LCFs) shall be carried out gradually over a transition period of 5 years (phased in), as set out in the current regulation.

In addition, the Group includes as eligible capital the additional Tier 1 capital instruments defined in Article 51 of the Solvency Regulations:

• Capital instruments, if they meet the conditions established under Article 52.1.

• Issue premiums related to the instruments to which the above section refers.

Finally, the entity also includes additional capital as total eligible capital. This is largely made up of the following elements:

• Subordinated debt received by the Group, understood as that which, for credit seniority purposes, comes behind all the common creditors. The issues, moreover, have to fulfill a number of conditions which are laid out in Article 63 of the Solvency Regulations.

• The surplus resulting between the allowances for losses on risks related to exposures calculated as per the IRB method on the losses they are expected to incur, for the part that is below 0.6% of the risk-weighted exposures calculated according to this method.

It will also include the book balances of generic allowances referring to securitized exposures which have been excluded from the risk-weighted exposures calculation under the IRB method, for the part not exceeding 0.6% of the risk-weighted exposures that would have corresponded to these securitized exposures, had they not been excluded. There is no treatment defined for the surplus of allowances over expected loss in portfolios assessed under the IRB approach above the 0.6% limit.

Furthermore, the book balance for generic allowances for losses reached in keeping with the Accounting Circular and which corresponds to those portfolios to which the standardized approach is applied, for an amount up to 1.25% of the weighted risks that have been the basis for the coverage calculation, will also be considered eligible additional capital.

Generic allowances for losses for those securitized assets that have been excluded from the risk-weighted exposures under the standardized approach are also eligible up to a limit of 1.25% of the weighted risks that would have corresponded to them, had they not been excluded. The surplus over the 1.25% limit is deducted from exposure.

Page 47

The table below presents the Group’s issues of other equity instruments and subordinated debt, which as explained above, form part of additional Tier 1 capital:

TABLE 6: Issues of preferred securities outstanding as of 31/Dec/2014

		Million euros
Preferred securities by issuers		2014				2013				2012
BBVA International Preferred, S.A.U. (*)			1,750				1,666				1,695
Unnim Group (**)			109				109				95
BBVA Capital Finance, S.A.U. (***)			25				29				32
Phoenix Loan Holdings, Inc.			20				15				16
BBVA International, Ltd. (***)			7				8				9
Total			1,910				1,827				1,847
Eligible limit (1)			1,470

(*) Listed on the London and New York Stock Exchanges

(**) Unnim Group: Issues prior to the acquisition by BBVA. The outstanding balance of these issues after the exchange of certain issues of preferred securities for BBVA shares completed in October 2012 is shown as of December 31, 2014.

(***) Issues traded on the AIAF market in Spain. As of December 31, 2014, the outstanding balances of these issues correspond to the holders of preferred securities that in December 2011 did not take part in the exchange of those preferred securities issues for subordinated bonds.

(1) Calculated based on article 486 of CRR

Page 48

TABLE 7: Issues of subordinated debt as of 31/Dec/2014

Issues of subordinated debt outstanding as of 31/Dec/2014

Million euros

Issuer company and issue date

Currency

Issue date

Maturity date

Eligibility

Current balance

Balance Eligible

Issues in euros

BANCO BILBAO VIZCAYA ARGENTARIA, S.A.

EUR

Jul-96

12/22/2016

YES

27

6

EUR

Jul-08

7/4/2023

YES

100

100

EUR

Feb-07

2/16/2022

NO

253

255

EUR

Mar-08

3/3/2033

NO

125

125

EUR

Several issues

Several

YES

68

EUR

Several issues

Several

NO

315

112

Subtotal

EUR

820

665

BBVA GLOBAL FINANCE LTD.

EUR

Jul-99

10/16/2015

YES

58

0

EUR

Oct-01

10/10/2016

YES

10

2

EUR

Oct-01

10/15/2016

YES

46

9

EUR

Nov-01

11/2/2016

YES

53

11

EUR

Dec-01

12/20/2016

YES

56

11

Subtotal

EUR

223

33

BBVA Subordinated Capital Finance SAU

EUR

Jul-08

7/22/2018

YES

20

12

EUR

May-08

5/19/2023

YES

50

50

EUR

Oct-05

10/13/2020

NO

96

99

EUR

Apr-07

4/4/2022

YES

66

68

EUR

Apr-14

4/11/2024

YES

1485

1,480

Subtotal

EUR

1,717

1,709

Total issues in euros

2,760

Issues in foreign currency

BBVA GLOBAL FINANCE LTD.

USD

Dec-95

12/1/2025

YES

165

160

Subtotal

USD

165

160

BANCO BILBAO VIZCAYA ARGENTARIA CHILE, S.A.

CLP

Several issues

Several

NO

578

519

Subtotal

CLP

578

519

BBVA BANCOMER

USD

Mar-11

3/10/2021

NO

1031

1030

USD

Apr-10

4/22/2020

NO

825

824

USD

Jul-12

9/30/2022

NO

825

824

USD

Sep-12

9/30/2022

NO

413

412

USD

May-07

5/17/2022

NO

413

412

USD

Nov-14

11/12/2029

NO

165

165

Subtotal

USD

3,672

3,665

MXN

Dec-08

11/26/2020

NO

160

160

Subtotal

MXN

160

160

Texas Regional Statutory Trust I

USD

Feb-04

3/17/2034

NO

41

41

Subtotal

USD

41

41

State National Capital Trust I

USD

Jul-03

9/30/2033

NO

12

12

Subtotal

USD

12

12

State National Statutory Trust II

USD

Mar-04

3/17/2034

NO

8

8

Subtotal

USD

8

8

Texasbanc Capital Trust I

USD

Jul-04

7/23/2034

NO

21

21

Subtotal

USD

21

21

BBVA COMPASS BANCSHARES, INC.

USD

Mar-05

4/1/2020

NO

182

188

USD

Mar-06

4/1/2026

NO

56

59

USD

Sep-07

10/1/2017

NO

288

115

Subtotal

USD

526

361

BBVA COLOMBIA, S.A.

COP

Sep-11

9/19/2018

NO

35

21

COP

Sep-11

9/19/2021

NO

36

36

COP

Sep-11

9/19/2026

NO

54

54

COP

Feb-13

2/19/2023

NO

69

69

COP

Feb-13

2/19/2028

NO

57

57

COP

Nov-14

11/26/2034

NO

55

55

COP

Nov-14

11/26/2029

NO

31

31

Subtotal

COP

337

323

BANCO CONTINENTAL, S.A.

USD

Dec-06

15-02-17

NO

25

25

USD

May-07

14-05-27

NO

17

16

USD

Sep-07

24-09-17

NO

16

16

USD

Feb-08

28-02-28

NO

17

16

USD

Jun-08

15-06-18

NO

25

25

USD

Nov-08

15-02-19

NO

17

16

USD

Oct-10

07-10-40

NO

165

165

USD

Oct-13

08-10-28

NO

37

37

USD

Sep-14

22-09-29

YES

246

247

Subtotal

USD

565

564

PEN

May-07

07-05-22

NO

11

11

PEN

Jun-07

18-06-32

NO

19

15

PEN

Nov-07

19-11-32

NO

17

14

PEN

Jul-08

08-07-23

NO

15

12

PEN

Sep-08

09-09-23

NO

16

14

PEN

Dec-08

15-12-33

NO

10

8

Subtotal

PEN

88

75

BBVA Paraguay, S.A.

USD

Nov-14

11/5/2021

NO

16

16

Subtotal

USD

16

16

BBVA URUGUAY S.A.

USD

Dec-14

12/19/2024

NO

12

12

Subtotal

USD

12

12

Total issues in other currencies (million euros)

6201

Total

8,961

Total balance eligible as fully-loaded

2,224

Page 49

TABLE 8: Issues of Contingent Convertible Bonds as of 31/Dec/2014

Issues of Contingent Convertible Bonds outstanding as of 31/Dec/2014

Issuer company

Currency

Issue date

December 2014

Issues in euros

BANCO BILBAO VIZCAYA ARGENTARIA, S.A.

USD

May-13

1,235

EUR

Feb-14

1,500

Subtotal

2,735

Total

2,735

2.2. Amount of capital

The accompanying table shows the amount of eligible capital, net of deductions, of the different elements comprising the capital base:

Page 50

TABLE 9: Amount of capital

Million euros		Eligible Capital
Eligible capital resources		2014				2013 (1)
Capital			3,024				2,835
Share Premium			23,992				22,111
Reserves			17,211				15,880
Minority interests			1,526				2,069
Deductions			-11,478				-8,535
-Goodwill and intangible assets			-8,738				-8,034
-Treasury stock			-350				-66
-Fin. treasury stock			-124				-171
- DTAs for loss carryforwards			-1,196				—
- Securitizations tranches at 1250%			-158				—
- Expected losses in equity			-44				—
- Financial investments < 10%			-67				—
- OCI Pensions			-395				-264
- Other deductionts			-408				—
Other (3)			155				—
Net attrib. profit and interim and final Group dividends			1,871				1,464
Other temporary adjustments CET1			5,171				—
Other temporary adjustments CET1 (minority interests)			360				—
Common Equity Tier 1			41,832				35,824
Eligible capital resources AT1			2,735				1,088
Preferred securities eligible as Tier 1			1,469				1,817
Other temporary adjustments Tier 1			-4,205				—
50% Tier 1 deductions			0				-786
Additional Tier 1			41,832				37,944
Subordinated debt eligible as T2			2,224				1,866
Eligible subordinated debt issued by subsidiaries			3,700				—
Grandfathering T1 instruments eligible as T2			1,917				—
Temporary adjustments eligible subordinated debt			1,823				—
Grandfathering adjustments Tier 1 instruments			-1,470				—
50% Tier 2 deductions (2)			0				-726
Surplus on generic provisions			2,793				2,589
Tier 2			10,986				3,729
TOTAL			52,818				41,672
CET1 (phased-in)			11.9	%			11.1	%
CET1 (fully-loaded)			10.4	%			11.1	%
TIER I (phased-in)			11.9	%			11.7	%
TIER II (phased-in)			3.1	%			1.2	%
RWAs (phased-in)			350,802				323,774
RWAs (fully-loaded)			350,608				323,774

⁽¹⁾  Under BIS II (Bank of Spain criterion)

⁽²⁾ The 50% Tier 2 deductions are net of the capital gains of the available-for-sale portfolio.

⁽³⁾  Includes valuation adjustments of portfolio and treasury stock

The variations in 2014 in the amounts of Tier 1 capital in the above table are basically due to the cumulative earnings to December net of dividends, the capital increase carried out during the year and the new issue of perpetual contingent convertibles. This increase is partially offset by the new deductions that took effect starting January 1, 2014 and the lower level of eligibility of certain elements (minority holdings, preference shares).

In Tier 2 capital the increase is mainly due to the variations in other subordinated liabilities due to current regulatory changes (Article 88 of the CRR), which calculate as Tier 2 the capital flow from subsidiaries, as well as the surplus due to excess Tier 2 at local level (phased in at 20%). In addition, as reflected in Table 8, the full compliance subordinate debt issue for €1.5 billion carried out in 2014 has helped improve the Group’s capital position.

Page 51

In the minimum eligible capital, the increase is due mainly to the different criteria applied in calculating requirements according to the CRR (new requirements such as, for example, the credit valuation adjustment (CVA), deferred tax assets or the part of significant holdings in financial institutions that is not deducted, etc.) and increased activity in the Group’s units, mainly outside Europe.

The process followed is shown below, according to the recommendations issued by the EBA and in line with the exercise of transparency conducted by the Bank. Based on the shareholders’ equity reported in the Group’s Annual Consolidated Financial Statements and by applying the deductions and adjustments shown in the table below, the regulatory capital figure for solvency purposes is arrived at:

TABLE 10: Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity with regulatory capital

		12/31/2014				12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Eligible capital resources		Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity with regulatory capital				Reconciliation of shareholders’ equity with regulatory capital
Capital			3,024				2,835
Share premium			23,993				22,111
Reserves			20,936				19,908
Other equity instruments			67				59
Own shares in portfolio			-350				-66
Attributed net income			2,618				2,228
Attributed dividend			-841				-765
Total shareholders’ funds (public balance sheet)			49,447				46,310
Valuation adjustments			-348				-3,831
Minority interests			2,511				2,371
Total equity (public balance sheet)			51,610				44,850
Shares and other eligible preferred securities			4,205				2,905
Goodwill and other intangible assets			-1,748				-7,834
Fin. treasury stock			-124				-171
Deductions			-1,872				-8,005
Valuation adjustments not eligible as basic capital			-3,567				-854
Capital gains from the Sovereign AFS fixed-income portfolio			-2,713				-780
Capital gains from the AFS equity portfolio			-854				-72
Exchange-rate variations non-current assets held for sale			0				-3
Valuation adjustments not eligible as basic capital (minority interests)			-140				-233
Minority interests valuation adjustments			-14				-115
Difference between accounting vs estimated interim dividend			-126				-118
Equity not eligible at solvency level			-3,707				-1,087
Other adjustments			-1,414				67
Tier 1 (before deductions)			48,822				38,730
(-) Tier 1 deductions			-6,990				-786
Tier 1			41,832				37,944

Page 52

3. Information on capital requirements

A breakdown of minimum capital requirements by risk type

Procedure employed in the internal capital adequacy assessment process

3.1. A breakdown of minimum capital requirements by risk type

Below is the total of capital requirements broken down by risk type as of December 31, 2014 and 2013.

The total amount for credit risk includes the positions in securitizations (standardized and advanced approach) and equity portfolio.

CHART 4: Capital requirements by risk type

As can be seen, the main risk for the Group continues to be Credit, followed by Operational Risk. A new point is credit valuation adjustment risk arising from derivatives, as established by the CRR, accounts for 1% of total requirements.

Page 53

TABLE 11: Capital requirements by risk type

(millions of euros)		Capital Amount
Exposure categories and risk types		2014
Credit risk			14,194
Central governments or central banks			2,388
Regional governments or local authorities			264
Public sector entities			107
Multilateral Development Banks			2
Institutions			211
Corporates			5,314
Retail			2,458
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			1,581
Exposures in default			436
Items associated with particularly high risk			12
Covered bonds			10
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			34
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			1
Other exposures			1,378
Securitized positions			85
Securitized positions			85
Total credit risk by the standardized approach			14,279
Credit risk			7,589
Central governments or central banks			30
Institutions			994
Corporates			4,880
Retail			1,685
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			834
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			576
Of which: Other retail assets			275
Equity			1,749
By method:
Of which: Simple Method			787
Of which: PD/LGD Method			833
Of which: Internal Models			129
By nature:
Of which: Exchange-traded equity instruments			822
Of which: Non-trading equity instruments in sufficiently diversified portfolios			927
Securitized positions			57
Total credit risk by the advanced measurement approach			9,395
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			23,674
Standardized:			234
Of which: Price Risk from fixed-income positions			202
Of which: Price risk for securitizations			2
Of which: Correlation price risk			6
Of which: Price Risk from equity portfolios			24
Advanced: Market Risk			712
TOTAL TRADING-BOOK ACTIVITY RISK			946
EXCHANGE RATE RISK (STANDARDIZED APPROACH)			732
RISK DUE TO CVA ADJUSTMENT			360
OPERATIONAL RISK			2,352
CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS			28,064

Page 54

(millions of euros)		Capital Amount
Exposure categories and risk types		2013
Credit risk			13,295
Central governments or central banks			1,489
Regional governments or local authorities			164
Public sector entities			112
Multilateral Development Banks			1
Institutions			342
Corporates			5,197
Retail			2,586
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			1,549
Exposures in default			728
Items associated with particularly high risk			93
Covered bonds			15
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			18
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			21
Other exposures			981
Securitized positions			138
Securitized positions			138
Total credit risk by the standardized approach			13,433
Credit risk			7,376
Central governments or central banks			17
Institutions			992
Corporates			4,488
Retail			1,879
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			1,018
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			612
Of which: Other retail assets			249
Equity			1,079
By method:
Of which: Simple Method			151
Of which: PD/LGD Method			821
Of which: Internal Models			107
By nature:
Of which: Exchange-traded equity instruments			670
Of which: Non-trading equity instruments in sufficiently diversified portfolios			408
Securitized positions			95
Total credit risk by the advanced measurement approach			8,550
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			21,983
Standardized:			224
Of which: Price Risk from fixed-income positions			190
Of which: Correlation price risk			12
Of which: Price Risk from equity portfolios			22
Advanced: Market Risk			616
TOTAL TRADING-BOOK ACTIVITY RISK			840
EXCHANGE RATE RISK (STANDARDIZED APPROACH)			780
OPERATIONAL RISK			2,421
OTHER CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS			-122
CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS			25,902

Below is a breakdown of the amount (in terms of original exposure, EAD and RWAs) of the above table that would correspond to counterparty risk:

Page 55

TABLE 12: Positions subject to counterparty risk in terms of EO, EAD and RWAs

(millions of euros) Exposure categories and risk types		2014
		Securities financing transactions												Derivatives and transactions with deferred settlement												From contractual netting between products
		EO				EAD				RWAs				EO				EAD				RWAs				EO				EAD				RWAs
Central governments or central banks			9,278				6,616				133				46				46				19				510				177				5
Regional governments or local authorities			—				—				—				42				42				8				61				61				12
Public sector entities			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Multilateral Development Banks			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Institutions			658				644				163				3,507				3,507				286				1,598				1,591				470
Corporates			36				32				32				1,190				1,190				1,187				947				947				946
Retail			1				0				0				95				95				70				11				11				7
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Exposures in default			—				—				—				0				0				0				3				3				4
Items associated with particularly high risk			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Covered bonds			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			34				34				34				—				—				—				—				—				—
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			105				31				6				0				0				0				—				—				—
Other exposures			0				0				—				48				48				0				0				0				0
Total credit risk by the standardized approach			10,112				7,357				369				4,927				4,927				1,570				3,130				2,791				1,444
Central governments or central banks			—				—				—				3				3				0				24				24				5
Institutions			54,922				54,922				1,096				1,743				1,743				619				12,714				12,714				1,466
Corporates			1,917				1,917				70				763				763				564				3,251				3,251				2,305
Retail			—				—				—				2				2				1				5				5				3
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—				—
Of which: Other retail assets			—				—				—				2				2				1				5				5				3
Total credit risk by the advanced measurement approach			56,839				56,839				1,165				2,510				2,510				1,184				15,994				15,994				3,779
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			66,951				64,196				1,535				7,438				7,438				2,754				19,124				18,785				5,223

The amounts shown in the table above on credit risk include the counterparty risk in trading-book activity as shown below:

TABLE 13: Amounts of counterparty risk in the trading book

(millions of euros) Counterparty Risk Trading Book Activities		Capital amount
		2014				2013
Standardized Approach			233				203
Advanced Measurement Approach			391				433
Total			624				636

* Also includes requirements related to securities financing transactions

The Group currently has a totally residual amount of capital requirements for trading-book activity liquidation risk.

3.2. Procedure used in the internal capital adequacy assessment process

To comply with the requirement of Pillar II of the Basel Accord, BBVA carries out the internal capital adequacy assessment process in accordance with Bank of Spain guidelines. The Group’s budgeting process is where it makes the calculations both for economic capital at risk allocated by the different business areas and for the regulatory capital base.

Economic capital is calculated by internal models that collect the historical data existing in the Group and calculate the capital necessary for pursuit of the activity adjusted for risks inherent to it. These calculations include additional risks to those contemplated in regulatory Pillar I.

Page 56

The following points are assessed within the internal capital adequacy assessment process:

• Systems of risk governance, management and control: Review of the corporate risk management culture, Internal Audit and capital governance. The BBVA Group has developed a system of corporate governance that is in line with the best international practices and adapted it to the requirements of the regulators in the country in which its different units operate.

• The Group’s risk profile: Measurement of the risks (including credit, operational, market, liquidity and other asset and liability risks) and quantification of the capital necessary to cover them. The analysis and valuation of the Bank’s risk profile is supported by a description of the current situation and projections by type of risk described. The valuation is supported by both quantitative data and qualitative factors.

• Capital target: Capital distribution between the Group’s companies and the targets set for it. The capital management policies designed to comply with these objectives include: regular estimates of capital needs; continuous management of the capital structure; and concentration of the capital surpluses in the Group’s parent.

• Capital planning: A projection is made of the Group’s capital base and that of the parent company and its main subsidiaries for the next three years and capital sufficiency is analyzed in accordance with the regulatory requirements and objectives set by the Bank at the end of the period.

Furthermore, a stress test is performed using a scenario in which macroeconomic values are estimated for an environment of greater economic downturn than the one budgeted, as determined by BBVA Research, and the consequences of this on the Group’s activity (increased NPA, lower activity levels, higher volatility in the financial markets, falls in the stock market, operating losses, liquidity crises, etc.) and its impact on the capital base (earnings, reserves, capacity to issue equity instruments, allowances, risk-weighted assets, etc.).

Estimations are also made on the possible cyclical nature of the models used. The stress scenarios cover recession situations in sufficiently long periods (20-30 years). Finally, backtesting is carried out on the data presented for the previous year.

• Future action program: If the conclusions of the report so require, corrective actions are programmed that enable the Bank’s equity situation to be optimized in view of the risks analyzed. The main programs for future action are focused on models of: credit risk, operational risk, market risk, real-estate risk and integration in management.

This process concludes with a document which is made available to the supervisor every year, for supervision of the targets and the action plan presented, enabling a dialog to be set up between the Supervisor and the Group concerning capital and solvency. At the same time, with the entry of the new single supervision mechanism on November 4, BBVA Group will also submit the 2014 report to the ECB to collateral that the new supervisor can incorporate it as an additional element for dialog with the entity.

Page 57

4. Credit risk

Definitions and accounting methodologies

• Definitions of non-performing assets and impaired positions

• Methods for determining value adjustments for impairment of assets and provisions

• Criteria for removing or maintaining assets subject to securitization on the balance sheet

• Criteria for the recognition of earnings in the event of the removal of assets from the balance sheet

• Key hypothesis for valuing risks and benefits retained on securitized assets

Information on credit risks

• Exposure to credit risk

• Average value of the exposures throughout 2014 and 2013

• Distribution by geographical area

• Distribution by sector

• Distribution by residual maturity

• Value adjustments for impairment losses and allowances for contingent risks and commitments

• Total impairment losses for the period

Information on Counterparty Risk

• Policy on managing counterparty risk

• Amounts of counterparty risk

Information on the standardized approach

• Information from external rating agencies

• Assignment of the credit ratings of public share issues

• Exposure values before and after the application of credit risk mitigation techniques

Information on the IRB method

• General information

• Exposure values by category and obligor grade

• Comparative analysis of the estimates made

• Weightings of specialized lending exposures

• Risk weightings of equity exposures

Information on securitizations

• General characteristics of securitizations

• Risk transfer in securitization activities

• Investment or retained securitizations

• Originated securitizations

Information on Credit Risk mitigation techniques

• Hedging based on netting operations on and off the balance sheet

• Hedging based on collaterals

• Hedging based on personal collaterals

• Risk concentration

RWA density by geographical area

Page 58

4.1. Definitions and accounting methodologies

4.1.1. Definitions of non-performing assets and impaired positions

The classification of financial assets impaired for reasons of customer default is done in an objective way and on an individual basis according to the following criterion:

• The total amount of debt instruments, irrespective of the holder and the collateral involved, with an amount past due for more than ninety days for principal, interest or contractually agreed expenses, unless they should be classified directly as write-offs.

• Contingent liabilities in which the collaterald party has incurred default. Debt instruments classified as impaired through the accumulation of balances in default for an amount exceeding 25% of the overall amounts pending collection.

Classification of financial assets impaired for reasons other than customer default is done individually for all risks whose individual amount is significant and for which there is a reasonable doubt about their total reimbursement under the terms and conditions agreed by contract, since they show objective evidence of impairment that negatively affects the cash flows expected from a financial instrument. Objective evidence of impairment of a financial asset or group of financial assets includes observable data about the following aspects:

• Significant financial difficulties on the part of the obligor.

• Continued delays in payment of interest or principal.

• Refinancing for the counterparty’s lending conditions.

• Bankruptcy and other types of reorganization/winding-up is likely.

• Disappearance of a financial asset from an active market due to financial difficulties.

• Observable data that suggest a reduction in future flows since the initial recognition, such as:

a. Adverse changes in the counterparty’s payment status (delays in payments, drawdowns on credit cards up to the limit, etc.).

b. Domestic or local economic conditions correlated with default (unemployment, fall in property prices, etc.).

Write-off risks are those debt instruments whose recovery is deemed remote and should be classified as final write-offs.

4.1.2. Methods for determining value adjustments for impairment of assets and provisions

The impairment on financial assets is calculated by type of instrument and other circumstances that may affect it, taking into account the collaterals received by the holders of the instruments to assure (fully or partially) the performance of the transactions. The BBVA Group recognizes impairment charges directly against the impaired asset when the likelihood of recovery is deemed remote, and uses an offsetting or allowance account when it records provisions made to cover estimated losses on their full value.

The amount of the deterioration of debt instruments valued at their amortized cost is calculated by whether the impairment losses are determined individually or collectively.

Page 59

4.1.2.1. Impairment losses determined individually

The amount of impairment losses recorded by these instruments coincides with the positive difference between their respective book values and the present values of future cash flows. These cash flows are discounted at the instrument’s original effective interest rate. If a financial instrument has a variable interest rate, the discount rate for measuring any impairment loss is the current effective rate determined under the contract.

As an exception to the rule described above, the market value of quoted debt instruments is deemed to be a fair estimate of the present value of their future cash flows. The estimation of future cash flows for debt instruments considers the following:

• All sums expected to be recovered during the remaining life of the instrument, including those that may arise from collateral and credit enhancements, if any (once deduction has been made of the costs required for their foreclosure and subsequent sale). Impairment losses include an estimate of the possibility of collecting of the accrued, past-due and uncollected interest.

• The various types of risk to which each instrument is subject.

• The circumstances under which the collections will foreseeably take place

With respect to impairment losses resulting from the materialization of insolvency risk of the obligors (credit risk), a debt instrument is impaired when:

• There is evidence of a reduction in the obligor’s capacity to pay, whether manifestly by default or for other reasons; and/or

• Country-risk materializes, understood as the common risk among debtors who are resident in a particular country as a result of factors other than normal commercial risk, such as sovereign risk, transfer risk or risks derived from international financial activity.

The BBVA Group has developed policies, methods and procedures to calculate the losses that it may incur as a result of its credit risks, whether attributable to the insolvency of counterparties or to country risk. These policies, methods and procedures are applied to the arrangement, study and documentation of debt instruments, risks and contingent commitments, as well as the detection of their deterioration and in the calculation of the amounts needed to cover the estimated losses.

4.1.2.2. Impairment losses determined collectively

The collectively determined losses are deemed to be equivalent to the portion of losses incurred on the date that the accompanying consolidated financial statements are prepared that has yet to be allocated to specific transactions.

Through statistical procedures using its historical experience and other specific information, the Group calculates the losses that, having occurred on the date of preparation of the accompanying consolidated financial statements, will become clear individually after the date the information is presented.

Quantification of losses incurred takes into account three basic factors: exposure at default, probability of default and loss given default.

• Exposure at default (EAD) is the amount of risk exposure at the date of default by the counterparty.

• Probability of default (PD) is the probability of the counterparty failing to meet its principal and/or interest payment obligations.

Page 60

• Loss given default (LGD) is the estimate of the loss arising in the event of default. It depends mainly on the characteristics of the counterparty and the valuation of the collaterals or collateral associated with the operation.

To calculate the LGD at each date in the balance sheet, the cash flows from the sale of collateral are estimated by calculating its sale price (in the case of real-estate collateral, the reduction it may have suffered in value is taken into account) and its cost. In the event of default, the property right is acquired contractually at the end of the foreclosure process or when the assets of borrowers in difficulty are purchased, and this right is recognized in the financial statements. After the initial recognition, these assets classified as “Non-current assets held for sale” or “Inventory” (see Notes 2.2.4 and 2.2.6 to the Group’s Annual Consolidated Financial Statements) are valued by the fair value corrected for the estimated cost of their sale or their book value, whichever is lower.

As of December 31, 2014, the results of estimated losses incurred for credit risk yielded by the Group’s internal models do not differ materially from the provisions determined in accordance with Bank of Spain requirements.

4.1.2.3. Methods used for provisioning for contingent exposures and commitments

Non-performing contingent exposures and commitments, except for letters of credit and other collaterals, are to be provisioned for an amount equal to the estimation of the sums expected to be disbursed that are deemed to be non-recoverable, applying criteria of valuation prudence. When calculating the provisions, criteria similar to those established for non-performing assets for reasons other than customer default are applied.

In any event, letters of credit and other collaterals provided which are classified as non-performing will be covered by applying similar criteria to those set out in the preceding section on value adjustments for impairment of assets.

Likewise, the inherent loss associated with letters of credit and other collaterals provided that are in force and not impaired is covered by applying similar criteria to those set out in the preceding section on impairment losses determined collectively.

4.1.3. Criteria for removing or maintaining assets subject to securitization on the balance sheet

The accounting procedure for the transfer of financial assets depends on the manner in which the risks and benefits associated with securitized assets are transferred to third parties.

Financial assets are only removed from the consolidated balance sheet when the cash flows they generate have dried up or when their implicit risks and benefits have been substantially transferred out to third parties.

Group is considered to substantially transfer the risks and benefits when these account for the majority of the overall risks and benefits of the securitized assets.

When the risks and benefits of transferred assets are substantially conveyed to third parties, the financial asset transferred is removed from the consolidated balance sheet, and any right or obligation retained or created as a result of the transfer is simultaneously recognized.

Page 61

In many situations, it is clear whether the entity has substantially transferred all the risks and benefits associated with the transfer of an asset or not. However, when it is not sufficiently clear if the transfer took place or not, the entity evaluates its exposure before and after the transfer by comparing the variation in the amounts and the calendar of the net cash flows of the transferred asset. Therefore, if the exposure to the variation in the current value of the net cash flows of the financial asset does not significantly change as a result of the transfer, it is understood that the entity has not substantially transferred all the risks and benefits associated with the ownership of the asset.

When the risks and/or benefits associated with the financial asset transferred are substantially retained, the asset transferred is not removed from the consolidated balance sheet and continues to be valued according to the same criteria applied prior to the transfer.

In the specific case of securitization funds to which Group institutions transfer their loan-books, existing contractual rights other than voting rights are to be considered with a view to analyzing their possible consolidation. It is also necessary to consider the design and purpose of each fund, as well as the following factors, among others:

• Evidence of the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the funds according to the specific needs of the business (including the decisions that may arise in particular circumstances only).

• Possible existence of special relationships with the funds.

• The Group’s implicit or explicit commitments to back the funds.

• Whether the Group has the capacity to use its power over the funds to influence the amount of the returns to which it is exposed.

Thus, there are cases where the Group is highly exposed to the existing variable returns and retains decision-making powers over the institution, either directly or through an agent. In these cases, the securitization funds are consolidated with the Group.

4.1.4. Criteria for the recognition of earnings in the event of the removal of assets from the balance sheet

In order for the Group to recognize the result generated on the sale of financial instruments, the sale has to involve the corresponding removal from the accounts, which requires the fulfillment of the requirements governing the substantial transfer of risks and benefits as described in the preceding point. The result will be reflected on the income statement, and calculated as the difference between the book value and the net value received, including any new additional assets obtained minus any liabilities assumed.

When the amount of the financial asset transferred matches the total amount of the original financial asset, the new financial assets, financial liabilities and liabilities for the provision of services, as appropriate, that are generated as a result of the transfer will be recorded according to their fair value.

4.1.5. Key hypothesis for valuing risks and benefits retained on securitized assets

The Group considers that a substantial withholding is made of the risks and benefits of securitizations when the subordinated bonds of issues are kept and/or it grants subordinated finance to the securitization funds that mean substantially retaining the credit losses expected from the loans transferred.

The Group currently has traditional securitizations only, and no synthetic securitizations.

Page 62

4.2. Information on credit risks

4.2.1. Exposure to credit risk

Pursuant to Article 5 of the Solvency Regulations, with respect to the capital requirements for credit risk, exposure is understood to be any asset item and all items included in the Group’s memorandum accounts involving credit risk and not deducted from the Group’s eligible capital. Accordingly, inclusion is made mainly of customer lending items, with their corresponding undrawn balances, letters of credit and collaterals, debt securities and capital instruments, cash and deposits in central banks and credit institutions, assets purchased or sold under a repurchase agreement (asset and liability repos), financial derivatives and fixed assets.

Below is a presentation of the balance of the original exposure and the allowances under the advanced measurement and standardized approaches as of December 31, 2014 and 2013. In accordance with Article 444 e) of the Solvency Regulations, only the exposure net of allowances is presented for those exposures calculated under the standardized approach.

TABLE 14: Exposure to credit risk

																														31/12/2014
														Exposure after applying conversion factors
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Original exposure (1)				Provisions (2)				Exposure Net of provisions (3)				On-balance-sheet exposure after mitigation techniques				Off-balance-sheet exposure after mitigation techniques				Fully Adjusted Value of the exposure				Average CCF				EAD
Central governments or central banks			103,926				-18				103,909				106,406				2,498				108,904				51	%			107,683
Regional governments or local authorities			7,482				-15				7,467				7,236				151				7,387				55	%			7,320
Public sector entities			5,524				-29				5,496				2,181				918				3,099				38	%			2,532
Multilateral Development banks			93				0				93				92				0				93				0	%			92
International organizations			16				0				16				16				0				16				2	%			16
Institutions			20,366				-22				20,344				10,337				10,040				20,377				11	%			11,461
Corporates			107,908				-163				107,744				59,464				42,678				102,143				28	%			71,340
Retail			59,973				-467				59,506				40,604				16,581				57,185				16	%			43,338
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			54,500				-353				54,147				51,750				732				52,482				49	%			52,109
Exposures in default			9,311				-3,440				5,870				5,181				63				5,244				68	%			5,224
Items associated with particularly high risk			380				-31				349				174				35				208				7	%			176
Covered bonds			605				0				605				605				0				605				0	%			605
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			2,063				0				2,063				1,834				0				1,834				0	%			1,834
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			124				0				124				46				4				51				92	%			50
Other exposures			27,105				-84				27,020				30,801				667				31,468				79	%			31,329
TOTAL STANDARDIZED APPROACH			399,375				-4,621				394,754				316,727				74,369				391,096								335,110
Central governments or central banks			3,001				-4				N/A				4,153				749				4,902				50	%			4,529
Institutions			112,235				-78				N/A				105,642				6,338				111,981				61	%			109,494
Corporates			130,154				-6,711				N/A				75,120				53,389				128,508				52	%			102,682
Retail			96,276				-1,620				N/A				83,698				12,577				96,276				5	%			86,866
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			70,113				-721				N/A				69,880				233				70,113				10	%			69,892
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			17,943				-516				N/A				6,377				11,566				17,943				24	%			9,134
Of which: Other retail assets			8,219				-384				N/A				7,441				778				8,219				51	%			7,839
TOTAL ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			341,667				-8,413								268,613				73,054				341,667								303,570
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			741,042				-13,034				394,754				585,340				147,423				732,762				—				638,680
Securitized positions			3,765				-38				2,705				3,747				0				3,747				0	%			3,747
Standardized Approach			2,723				-18				2,705				2,705				0				2,705				0	%			2,705
Advanced Measurement Approach			1,042				-21				N/A				1,042				0				1,042				0	%			1,042
Equity			10,696				-61				N/A				10,442				0				10,442				0	%			10,696
Simple Method			3,980				-40				N/A				3,980				0				3,980				0	%			3,980
Non-trading equity instruments in sufficiently diversified portfolios			3,712				-34				N/A				3,712				0				3,712				0	%			3,712
Exchange-traded equity instruments			268				-6				N/A				268				0				268				0	%			268
PD/LGD Method			6,462				0				N/A				6,462				0				6,462				0	%			6,462
Internal Models			254				-21				N/A				0				0				0				0	%			254
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			755,503				-13,134				397,459				599,529				147,423				746,952				—				653,124

Notes

(1) Gross exposure prior to the application of risk mitigation techniques.

(2) Includes provisions for impairment of financial and non-financial assets and other valuation adjustments, with the exception of the generic provision included in the capital base as more additional capital, as per solvency regulations

(3) Exposures are adjusted solely by provisions in the case of exposures by the standardized approach.

Page 63

																														12/31/2013
														Exposure after applying conversion factors
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Original exposure (1)				Provisions (2)				Exposure Net of provisions (3)				On-balance-sheet exposure after mitigation techniques				Off-balance-sheet exposure after mitigation techniques				Fully Adjusted Value of the exposure				Average CCF				EAD
Central governments or central banks			93,548				-47				93,502				87,386				5,664				93,050				41	%			89,724
Regional governments or local authorities			9,195				0				9,195				6,500				347				6,847				47	%			6,663
Public sector entities			4,486				0				4,486				3,511				1,318				4,829				36	%			3,980
Multilateral Development Banks			50				0				50				50				0				50				0	%			50
International organizations			8				0				8				8				0				8				1	%			8
Institutions			20,702				-12				20,690				10,606				9,728				20,334				42	%			14,713
Corporates			93,305				-806				92,499				55,710				31,152				86,862				36	%			66,969
Retail			60,395				-67				60,328				41,141				16,205				57,346				14	%			43,372
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			51,916				-115				51,801				49,670				795				50,465				48	%			50,050
Exposures in default			14,836				-4,163				10,674				8,657				71				8,728				25	%			8,675
Items associated with particularly high risk			1,133				-16				1,118				877				53				930				1	%			878
Covered bonds			911				0				911				911				0				911				0	%			911
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			663				0				663				663				0				663				0	%			663
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			816				0				816				253				8				261				100	%			261
Other exposures			22,210				-98				22,112				26,860				735				27,595				38	%			27,139
TOTAL STANDARDIZED APPROACH			374,175				-5,323				368,852				292,804				66,075				358,879								314,055
Central governments or central banks			1,581				-2				—				2,707				808				3,515				50	%			3,115
Institutions			89,458				-76				—				80,993				8,161				89,155				56	%			85,558
Corporates			114,333				-6,717				—				63,196				49,507				112,703				53	%			89,644
Retail			96,037				-1,566				—				84,850				11,186				96,036				26	%			86,750
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			72,829				-676				—				72,446				383				72,829				6	%			72,470
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			17,160				-532				—				6,544				10,616				17,160				26	%			9,273
Of which: Other retail assets			6,048				-357				—				5,860				187				6,047				56	%			5,006
TOTAL ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			301,409				-8,362				0				231,746				69,662				301,407								265,066
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			675,584				-13,685				368,852				524,550				135,737				660,287				—				579,122
Securitized positions			5,730				-66				4,783				5,692				0				5,692				0	%			5,619
Standardized Approach			4,820				-37				4,783				4,783				—				4,783				0	%			4,710
Advanced Measurement Approach			910				-28								910				—				910				0	%			910
Equity			8,818				-128				—				8,443				—				8,443				0	%			8,818
Simple Method			830				-63				—				830				—				830				0	%			830
Non-trading equity instruments in sufficiently diversified portfolios			620				-59				—				620				—				620				0	%			620
Exchange-traded equity instruments			209				-5				—				209				—				209				0	%			209
PD/LGD Method			7,613				0				—				7,613				—				7,613				0	%			7,613
Internal Models			375				-65				—				0				—				0				0	%			375
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			690,132				-13,878				373,635				538,685				135,737				674,422				—				593,559

Notes

(1) Gross exposure prior to the application of risk mitigation techniques.

(2) Include provisions for impairment of financial and non-financial assets and other valuation adjustments, with the exception of the generic provision included in the capital base as more additional capital, as per solvency regulations.

(3) Exposures are adjusted solely by provisions in the case of exposures by the Standardized Approach.

4.2.2. Average value of the exposures throughout 2014 and 2013.

The table below shows the average value of exposure to credit risk in 2014 and 2013 for both the advanced measurement and standardized approaches for each one of the exposure categories:

Page 64

TABLE 15: Average value of the exposures throughout 2013 and 2014

(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Original average exposure for the period
		2014				2013
Central governments or central banks			96,222				97,465
Regional governments or local authorities			6,575				9,900
Public sector entities			6,059				3,728
Multilateral Development banks			91				79
International organizations			10				15
Institutions			20,217				22,879
Corporates			100,720				95,588
Retail			58,305				57,316
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			54,005				53,552
Exposures in default			10,776				13,454
Items associated with particularly high risk			454				1,435
Covered bonds			4,481				775
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			2,040				734
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			169				243
Other exposures			25,388				23,228
TOTAL STANDARDIZED APPROACH			385,512				380,388
Central governments or central banks			2,495				1,367
Institutions			96,324				83,660
Corporates			123,953				120,542
Retail			101,774				97,614
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			70,895				73,971
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			17,827				17,404
Of which: Other retail assets			6,526				6,240
TOTAL ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			324,546				303,183
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY (5)			710,058				683,571
Securitized positions			3,573				6,630
Of which: Standardized Approach			2,539				5,692
Of which: Advanced Measurement Approach			1,034				938
Equity			10,414				7,344
Of which: Simple Method			4,053				874
Equity instruments in sufficiently diversified portfolios			696				646
Exchange Traded equity instruments			3,357				228
Of which: PD/LGD Method			5,901				5,979
Of which: Internal Models			460				491
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			724,045				697,545

4.2.3. Distribution by geographical area

The following chart shows the distribution by geographical area of the original exposure based on the obligor’s country. The breakdown includes exposure under the standardized and advanced measurement approaches, without including positions in securitizations or equity.

Page 65

TABLE 16: Distribution by geographical area of exposure to credit risk

(millions of euros)																						12/31/2014
Category of exposure		Total				Europe				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Central governments or central banks			103,926				66,734				12,913				5,663				18,617				0
Regional governments or local authorities			7,482				1,920				1,014				4,461				86				0
Public sector entities			5,524				385				3,148				236				1,710				45
Multilateral Development banks			93				38				0				12				42				0
International organizations			16				16				0				0				0				0
Institutions			20,366				13,691				1,542				1,883				2,685				565
Corporates			107,908				18,794				16,159				49,601				22,853				500
Retail			59,973				19,891				5,915				7,302				26,826				39
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			54,500				17,747				9,799				14,024				12,926				3
Exposures in default			9,311				6,586				947				528				1,224				26
Items associated with particularly high risk			380				380				0				0				0				0
Covered bonds			605				0				605				0				0				0
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			2,063				211				0				1,238				614				0
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			124				113				0				7				5				0
Other exposures			27,105				14,535				6,559				1,491				4,494				26
Securitized positions			2,723				867				188				1,666				0				1
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			402,098				161,910				58,790				88,112				92,082				1,205
Central governments or central banks			3,001				152				113				1,619				464				654
Institutions			112,235				105,369				540				3,276				172				2,878
Corporates			130,154				99,706				15,408				7,558				2,546				4,937
Retail			96,276				82,149				14,111				2				8				5
Securitized positions			1,042				1,006				0				34				0				2
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			342,709				288,382				30,172				12,489				3,191				8,475
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			744,807				450,292				88,962				100,601				95,273				9,680

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

(millions of euros)																						12/31/2013
Category of exposure		Total				Europe				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Central governments or central banks			93,548				59,983				12,015				3,436				18,062				52
Regional governments or local authorities			9,195				1,657				6,142				1,113				190				93
Public sector entities			4,486				1,792				0				323				2,371				0
Multilateral Development banks			50				0				0				0				50				0
International organizations			8				8				0				0				0				0
Institutions			20,702				12,460				2,686				1,992				3,431				133
Corporates			93,305				11,920				19,465				41,147				20,198				575
Retail			60,395				20,602				7,524				7,130				25,129				9
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			51,916				16,986				10,531				12,714				11,677				9
Exposures in default			14,836				12,090				1,408				420				915				2
Items associated with particularly high risk			1,133				810				79				86				111				47
Covered bonds			911				0				911				0				0				0
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			663				196				0				3				464				0
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			816				804				0				6				5				0
Other exposures			22,210				7,645				7,230				1,778				5,557				0
Securitized positions			4,820				253				70				4,498				0				0
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			378,995				147,206				68,062				74,646				88,160				921
Central governments or central banks			1,581				116				2				591				480				392
Institutions			89,458				84,704				431				2,126				196				2,003
Corporates			114,333				99,961				816				6,933				2,154				4,470
Retail			96,037				82,453				13,428				18				39				99
Securitized positions			910				898				0				0				0				12
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			302,319				268,131				14,676				9,668				2,869				6,975
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			681,314				415,337				82,739				84,313				91,029				7,896

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

As can be seen from the above table, the original exposure in Europe under advanced credit risk models accounts for over 60% of the total, while in the remaining countries the percentage is around 20%.

It also shows graphically the distribution of original exposure by geographical area, revealing the Group’s high level of geographical diversification, which constitutes one of the key levers for its strategic growth.

Page 66

CHART 5: Distribution by geographical area of exposure to credit risk

The next table shows the distribution by geographical area of the book balances of the allowances for financial and non-financial asset losses and for contingent liabilities.

TABLE 17: Distribution by geographical area of the book balances of the non-performing and impaired exposures of financial assets and contingent liabilities

2014																						12/31/2014
(millions of euros)		Total				Europe				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Non-performing and impaired exposures			24,970				21,547				1,271				576				1,501				74

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

2013																						12/31/2013
(millions of euros)		Total				Europe				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Non-performing and impaired exposures			25,977				23,648				1,297				342				680				11

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

The next table shows the distribution by geographical area of the book balances of the allowances for financial asset losses and for contingent liabilities:

TABLE 18: Distribution by geographical area of the book balances of the value adjustments for impairment of financial assets and contingent liabilities

2014																						12/31/2014
(millions of euros)		Total				Europe				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Value adjustments and provisions			15,254				12,419				1,486				242				1,093				14

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

2013																						12/31/2013
(millions of euros)		Total				Europe				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Value adjustments and provisions			15,914				12,213				1,606				597				1,489				9

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

Page 67

4.2.4. Distribution by sector

Below is the distribution by economic sector (standardized and advanced measurement approaches) of the original exposure, excluding equity positions.

TABLE 19: Distribution by sector of exposure to credit risk

																																		12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Total				Original exposure by sector
						Credit institutions, insurance and brokerage				Public sector				Agriculture				Industry				Construction				Commercial				Individuals				Other sectors
Central governments or central banks			103,926				0.06	%			13.59	%			0.00	%			0.05	%			0.01	%			0.05	%			0.11	%			0.07	%
Regional governments or local authorities			7,482				0.07	%			0.58	%			0.00	%			0.05	%			0.02	%			0.06	%			0.13	%			0.08	%
Public sector entities			5,524				0.01	%			0.69	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.02	%			0.01	%
Multilateral Development Banks			93				0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
International organizations			16				0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Institutions			20,366				1.00	%			0.37	%			0.02	%			0.21	%			0.07	%			0.23	%			0.51	%			0.33	%
Corporates			107,908				0.36	%			0.52	%			0.39	%			2.36	%			1.01	%			6.47	%			0.66	%			2.72	%
Retail			59,973				0.18	%			0.13	%			0.10	%			0.47	%			0.24	%			0.74	%			4.91	%			1.29	%
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			54,500				0.10	%			0.13	%			0.04	%			0.18	%			0.10	%			0.32	%			4.47	%			1.98	%
Exposures in default			9,311				0.02	%			0.03	%			0.02	%			0.07	%			0.12	%			0.13	%			0.41	%			0.44	%
Items associated with particularly high risk			380				0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.02	%			0.02	%
Covered bonds			605				0.08	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			2,063				0.01	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.18	%			0.01	%			0.06	%
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			124				0.02	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Other exposures			27,105				0.21	%			0.20	%			0.01	%			0.12	%			0.04	%			0.14	%			0.28	%			2.65	%
Securitized positions			2,723				0.03	%			0.28	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.06	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			402,098				2.16	%			16.53	%			0.58	%			3.54	%			1.61	%			8.39	%			11.54	%			9.65	%
Central governments or central banks			3,001				0.00	%			0.40	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Institutions			112,235				11.59	%			0.74	%			0.03	%			0.43	%			0.14	%			0.46	%			1.03	%			0.66	%
Corporates			130,154				0.87	%			0.06	%			0.12	%			6.49	%			1.54	%			2.35	%			0.18	%			5.86	%
Retail			96,276				0.00	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.08	%			0.03	%			0.12	%			12.59	%			0.08	%
Securitized positions			1,042				0.14	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			342,708				12.60	%			1.19	%			0.16	%			7.00	%			1.71	%			2.93	%			13.80	%			6.60	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			744,807				14.76	%			17.72	%			0.74	%			10.54	%			3.33	%			11.32	%			25.34	%			16.25	%

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

																																		12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Total				Original exposure by sector
						Credit institutions, insurance and brokerage				Public sector				Agriculture				Industry				Construction				Commercial				Individuals				Other sectors
Central governments or central banks			93,548				0.00	%			13.73	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Regional governments or local authorities			9,195				0.00	%			1.35	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Public sector entities			4,486				0.00	%			0.66	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Multilateral Development Banks			50				0.00	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
International organizations			8				0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Institutions			20,702				3.04	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Corporates			93,305				0.47	%			0.03	%			0.57	%			1.81	%			0.91	%			6.38	%			0.00	%			3.52	%
Retail			60,395				0.07	%			0.00	%			0.15	%			0.37	%			0.22	%			1.17	%			5.65	%			1.24	%
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			51,916				0.01	%			0.00	%			0.03	%			0.10	%			0.11	%			0.23	%			5.05	%			2.09	%
Exposures in default			14,836				0.07	%			0.01	%			0.03	%			0.16	%			0.18	%			0.19	%			0.80	%			0.74	%
Items associated with particularly high risk			1,133				0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.01	%			0.02	%			0.03	%			0.09	%
Covered bonds			911				0.13	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			663				0.03	%			0.00	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.02	%			0.01	%			0.00	%			0.03	%
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			816				0.12	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Other exposures			22,210				0.22	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.05	%			0.02	%			0.05	%			0.22	%			2.69	%
Securitized positions			4,820				0.05	%			0.55	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.11	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			378,995				4.21	%			16.34	%			0.80	%			2.51	%			1.47	%			8.15	%			11.75	%			10.40	%
Central governments or central banks			1,581				0.00	%			0.23	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
Institutions			89,458				8.95	%			4.17	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.02	%
Corporates			114,333				1.58	%			0.05	%			0.08	%			5.70	%			1.70	%			2.00	%			0.01	%			5.66	%
Retail			96,037				0.01	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.02	%			0.01	%			0.02	%			14.01	%			0.03	%
Securitized positions			910				0.13	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%			0.00	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			302,319				10.67	%			4.45	%			0.09	%			5.72	%			1.70	%			2.02	%			14.02	%			5.71	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK			681,314				14.88	%			20.79	%			0.88	%			8.23	%			3.17	%			10.17	%			25.77	%			16.11	%

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

The following table shows the distribution by counterparty of the book balances of the non-performing and impaired exposures of financial assets and contingent liabilities.

Page 68

TABLE 20: Distribution by sector of the book balances of the non-performing and impaired exposures of financial assets and contingent liabilities

																						12/31/2014
2014 (millions of euros)		Total				Credit institutions, insurance and brokerage				Public sector				Corporates				Retail				Other sectors
Non-performing and impaired exposures			24,970				1.01	%			1.39	%			60.44	%			30.81	%			6.35	%

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

																						12/31/2013
2013 (millions of euros)		Total				Credit institutions, insurance and brokerage				Public sector				Corporates				Retail				Other sectors
Non-performing and impaired exposures			25,977				0.91	%			1.05	%			59.69	%			30.61	%			7.73	%

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

The next table shows the distribution by counterparty of the book balances of allowances for financial asset losses and for contingent exposures:

TABLE 21: Distribution by sector of the book balances of the value adjustments for impairment of financial assets and contingent liabilities

for financial asset losses and for contingent exposures:

																						12/31/2014
2014 (millions of euros)		Total				Credit institutions, insurance and brokerage				Public sector				Corporates				Retail				Other sectors
Value adjustments and provisions			15,254				2.13	%			1.02	%			58.94	%			27.72	%			10.18	%

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

																						12/31/2013
2013 (millions of euros)		Total				Credit institutions, insurance and brokerage				Public sector				Corporates				Retail				Other sectors
Value adjustments and provisions			15,914				1.99	%			1.98	%			60.55	%			25.78	%			9.71	%

Note: Accounting balances solvency perimeter excluding equity positions

4.2.5. Distribution by residual maturity

The following table shows the distribution of original exposure by residual maturity, broken down by category of exposure under the standardized and advanced measurement approaches, excluding positions in equity:

Page 69

TABLE 22: Distribution by residual maturity of exposure to credit risk

														12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Total				Original exposure by residual maturity
						Less than 1 year				Between 1 and 5 years				Over 5 years
Central governments or central banks			103,926				48,471				29,950				25,506
Regional governments or local authorities			7,482				1,974				1,542				3,966
Public sector entities			5,524				742				1,042				3,740
Multilateral Development Banks			93				5,141				6,526				-11,574
International organizations			16				2				13				1
Institutions			20,366				-1,016				13,298				8,084
Corporates			107,908				20,525				49,438				37,945
Retail			59,973				24,052				21,151				14,770
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			54,500				3,157				6,896				44,447
Exposures in default			9,311				2,649				3,374				3,288
Items associated with particularly high risk			380				54				77				249
Covered bonds			605				0				605				0
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			2,063				43				999				1,020
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			124				111				2				11
Other exposures			27,105				7,711				9,823				9,571
Securitized positions			2,723				3				186				2,534
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			402,098				113,617				144,922				143,558
Central governments or central banks			3,001				883				231				1,887
Institutions			112,235				72,927				16,934				22,374
Corporates			130,154				51,038				44,782				34,335
Retail			96,276				1,492				4,328				90,456
Securitized positions			1,042				0				714				328
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			342,709				126,340				66,989				149,380
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			744,807				239,957				211,911				292,938

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

														12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Total				Original exposure by residual maturity
						Less than 1 year				Between 1 and 5 years				Over 5 years
Central governments or central banks			93,548				51,537				27,839				14,172
Regional governments or local authorities			9,195				2,617				1,241				5,337
Public sector entities			4,486				1,916				1,765				805
Multilateral Development Banks			50				50				0				0
International organizations			8				0				8				0
Institutions			20,702				12,030				5,481				3,191
Corporates			93,305				30,388				37,122				25,795
Retail			60,395				25,034				22,522				12,839
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			51,916				3,189				6,686				42,041
Exposures in default			14,836				1,078				13,758				0
Items associated with particularly high risk			1,133				250				459				424
Covered bonds			911				0				911				0
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			663				535				50				78
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			816				810				0				6
Other exposures			22,210				13,361				769				8,080
Securitized positions			4,820				5				143				4,671
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			378,995				142,802				118,754				117,440
Central governments or central banks			1,581				309				279				994
Institutions			89,458				54,088				17,393				17,978
Corporates			114,333				51,103				35,848				27,381
Retail			96,037				14,876				3,944				77,217
Securitized positions			910				277				434				199
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			302,319				120,653				57,897				123,769
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			681,314				263,454				176,651				241,209

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

Page 70

4.2.6. Value adjustments for impairment losses and allowances for contingent risks and commitments

The following table presents the movement recorded in the years 2014 and 2013 in the value adjustments for allowances and impairment losses of financial assets on the balance sheet and for contingent risks and commitments, including country risk, generic and specific funds.

TABLE 23: Value adjustments for impairment losses and allowances for contingent risks and commitments

										12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Item		Value adjustments and provisions				Provisions for contingent liabilities and commitments				Total
BALANCE AT START OF YEAR			15,548				367				15,914
Increase in impairment charged to income			11,783				82				11,865
Decrease in impairment credited to income			-6,865				-67				-6,932
Institutions acquired by the Group during the year			0				0				0
Institutions disposed of during the year			0				0				0
Transfers to written-off loans			-4,464				-1				-4,464
Exchange differences and others			-1,151				23				-1,129
BALANCE AT END OF YEAR (1)			14,850				404				15,254
Of which:
For impaired portfolio			12,037				219				12,256
For current non-impaired portfolio			2,813				184				2,997

Note: Solvency perimeter

(1) Includes generic provision eligible as capital

										12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Item		Value adjustments and provisions				Provisions for contingent liabilities and commitments				Total
BALANCE AT START OF YEAR			14,801				341				15,142
Increase in impairment charged to income			11,054				96				11,150
Decrease in impairment credited to income			-4,921				-52				-4,973
Institutions acquired by the Group during the year			0				0				0
Institutions disposed of during the year			-30				-1				-31
Transfers to written-off loans			-3,838				0				-3,838
Exchange differences and others			-1,518				-18				-1,521
BALANCE AT END OF YEAR			15,548				367				15,914
Of which:
For impaired portfolio			12,987				202				13,190
For current non-impaired portfolio			2,560				165				2,725
Note: Solvency perimeter

4.2.7. Total impairment losses for the period

The following table shows details of impairment losses and allowances on financial assets and contingent risks and commitments, as well as derecognition of losses recognized previously in asset write-offs recorded directly in the income statement in 2014 and 2013.

Page 71

TABLE 24: Total impairment losses for the period

Million euros
ITEMS		2014				2013
Financial assets			4,401				5,628
Of which:
Recovery of written-off assets			443				362
Contingent exposure and commitments (recoveries)			15				44
Total impairment losses			4,417				5,672

4.3. Information on counterparty risk

Counterparty exposure involves that part of the original exposure corresponding to derivative instruments, repurchase and resale transactions, securities or commodities lending or borrowing transactions and deferred settlement transactions.

4.3.1. Policies on managing counterparty risk

4.3.1.1. Methodology: allocation of internal capital and limits to exposures subject to counterparty risk

The Group has an economic model for calculating internal capital through exposure to counterparty risk in treasury operations. This model has been implemented in the Risk unit systems in Market areas. It is used to measure the credit exposures for each of the counterparties for which the entity operates.

The generation of exposures is undertaken in a manner that is consistent with those used for the monitoring and control of credit risk limits. The time horizon is divided up into intervals, and the market risk factors (interest rates, exchange rates, etc.) underlying the instruments that determine their valuation are simulated for each interval. The exposures are generated from 500 different scenarios using the Monte Carlo method for risk factors (subject to counterparty risk) and applying the corresponding mitigating factors to each counterparty (i.e. applying collateral and/or netting agreements as applicable).

The correlations, loss given defaults, internal ratings and associated probabilities of default are consistent with the Group’s economic model for general credit risk.

The capital for each counterparty is then calculated using the exposure profile and taking into account the analytical formula adopted by Basel. This figure is modified by an adjustment factor for the possible maturity subsequent to one year of the operations in a similar vein to the general approach adopted by Basel for the treatment of credit risk.

Counterparty limits are specified within the financial programs authorized for each subsidiary within the line item of treasury limits. It stipulates both the limit and the maximum term for the operation. The use of transactions within the limits is measured in terms of mark-to-market valuation plus the potential risk using the Monte Carlo Simulation methodology (95% confidence level) and bearing in mind possible mitigating factors (such as netting, break clauses or collateral contracts).

Management of consumption by lines in the Markets area is carried out through a corporate platform that enables online monitoring of the limits and availabilities established for the different counterparties and clients. This control is completed by independent units of the business area to collateral proper segregation of functions.

Page 72

4.3.1.2. Policies for ensuring the effectiveness of collaterals and establishing the value adjustments for impairment to cover this risk

The Group has concluded collateral contracts with many of its counterparties that serve as a collateral of the mark-to-market valuation of derivatives operations. The collateral consists mostly of deposits, which means that no situations of impairment are forthcoming.

The MENTOR tool has been specifically designed to store and process the collateral contracts concluded with counterparties. This application enables the existence of collateral to be taken into account at the transaction level (useful for controlling and monitoring the status of specific operations) as well as at the counterparty level. Furthermore, said tool feeds the applications responsible for estimating counterparty risk by providing all the necessary parameters for considering the impact of mitigation in the portfolio due to the agreements signed.

Likewise, there is also an application that reconciles and adjusts the positions serving the Collateral and Risks units.

In order to collateral the effectiveness of collateral contracts, the Group carries out a daily monitoring of the market values of the operations governed by such contracts and of the deposits made by the counterparties. Once the amount of the collateral to be delivered or received is obtained, the collateral demand (margin call), or the demand received, is carried out at the intervals established in the contract, usually daily. If significant variations arise from the process of reconciliation between the counterparties, after a reconciliation in economic terms they are reported by the Collateral unit to the Risks unit for subsequent analysis and monitoring. Within the control process, the Collateral unit issues a daily report on the collaterals which includes a description by counterparty of the exposure and collateral, making special reference to those collateral deficits at or beyond the set warning levels.

Financial assets and liabilities may be the object of netting, in other words presentation for a net amount in the balance sheet, only when the Group’s entities comply with the provisions of IAS 32—Paragraph 42, and thus have the legally obliged right to offset the amounts recognized, and the intention to settle the net amount or to divest the asset and pay the liability at the same time.

In addition, the Group has assets and liabilities on the balance sheet that are not netted and for which there are master netting agreements, but for which there is neither the intention nor the right to settle. The most common types of events that trigger netting of reciprocal obligations include the bankruptcy of the credit institution in question, swiftly accumulating indebtedness, default, restructuring or the winding up of the entity.

In the current market context, derivatives are contracted under different framework contracts, with the most general being those developed by International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA), and for the Spanish market the Framework Financial Operations Contract (CMOF). Practically all portfolio derivative operations have been concluded under these master contracts, including in them the netting clauses referred to in the above point as Master Netting Agreements, considerably reducing the credit exposure in these instruments. In addition, in the contracts concluded with professional counterparties, annexes are included with collateral agreements called Credit Support Annexes (CSA), thus minimizing exposure to a possible counterparty insolvency.

At the same time, in repurchase agreements the volume traded has increased strongly through clearing houses that use mechanisms to reduce counterparty risk, as well as through various master contracts in bilateral operations, the most common being the Global Master Repurchase Agreement (GMRA), which is published by the International Capital Market Association (ICMA). This tends to have clauses added relating to the exchange of collateral within the main body of the master contract itself.

Page 73

Below are the assets and liabilities subject to contractual netting rights as of December 31, 2014.

TABLE 25: Assets and liabilities subject to contractual netting rights

														Non-offsetted gross balance sheet’s amount
Million euros 2014		Gross Recognized Amount				Offsetted balance sheet amount				Net amount presented on balance sheet				Amount related to recognized financial instruments				Collateral (including cash)				Net amount
Trading and hedging derivatives			55,277				8,497				46,780				33,196				6,844				6,740
Total Assets			55,277				8,497				46,780				33,196				6,844				6,740
Trading and hedging derivatives			56,710				9,327				47,383				33,158				9,624				4,601
Total Liabilities			56,710				9,327				47,383				33,158				9,624				4,601

4.3.1.3. Policies regarding the risk of adverse effects occurring due to correlations

Derivatives contracts may give rise to potential adverse correlation effects between the exposure to the counterparty and its credit quality (wrong-way-exposures). The Group has strict policies on the treatment of exposures of this nature. First, they follow specific admission processes for each individual operation, and second, they can compute the effects of risk, not for the potential value of the exposure, but for 100% of its nominal value depending on the type of operation.

4.3.1.4. Impact of collaterals in the event of a downgrade in their credit rating

In derivatives operations, as a general policy the Group does not subscribe collateral contracts that involve an increase in the amount to be deposited in the event of the Group being downgraded.

The general criterion applied to date with banking counterparties is to establish a zero threshold within collateral contracts, irrespective of the mutual rating; provision will be made as collateral of any difference that arises through mark-to-market valuation.

4.3.2. Amounts of counterparty risk

The calculation of the original exposure for the counterparty risk of derivatives, according to Part III, Title II, Chapter 6 of the Solvency Regulations, can be made by means of the following methods: original risk, mark-to-market valuation, standardized and internal models.

The Group calculates the value of exposure to risk through the mark-to-market method, obtained as the aggregate of the positive mark-to-market value after contractual netting agreements plus the potential future risk of each transaction or instrument.

There follows a specification of the amounts in million euros involved in the counterparty risk of derivatives as at December 31, 2014 and 2013:

Page 74

TABLE 26: Counterparty risk. Derivatives exposure. Netting effect and collateral

(millions of euros)
Derivatives exposure. Netting effect and collateral		2014				2013
Gross positive fair value of the contracts (accounting perimeter)			46,780				40,168
Gross positive fair value of the contracts (solvency perimeter)			48,911				42,101
Add-on			22,779				20,887
Positive effects of netting agreements			-45,467				-39,503
Credit exposure after netting and before collateral assigned			26,223				23,281
Collateral assigned			-5,356				-4,691
Credit exposure in derivatives after netting and before collateral assigned			20,867				18,590
RWA			7,799				7,945

The total exposure to counterparty risk, composed basically of repo transactions and OTC derivatives, is €93,506 million and €71,978 million, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively (after applying any netting agreements applicable).

Below are the EAD amounts after netting and collaterals received from the derivatives, broken down by product:

TABLE 27: Counterparty risk. EAD derivatives by product and risk

																										12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Products		Currency risk				Interest rate risk				Equity risk				Commodity risk				Credit risk				Other risks				TOTAL
Term operations			5,479				0				9				0				0				0				5,489
FRAs			0				1				0				0				0				0				1
Swaps			0				16,904				90				0				0				0				16,994
Options			149				2,282				991				1				0				0				3,423
Other products			0				0				0				0				316				0				316
TOTAL			5,629				19,187				1,090				1				316				0				26,223
																											12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Products		Currency risk				Interest rate risk				Equity risk				Commodity risk				Credit risk				Other risks				TOTAL
Term operations			2,895				76				95				0				0				0				3,066
FRAs			0				117				0				0				0				0				117
Swaps			654				16,162				105				9				0				0				16,930
Options			199				1,710				957				3				0				2				2,872
Other products			2				34				0				0				259				0				296
TOTAL			3,750				18,099				1,158				12				259				3				23,281

4.3.2.1. Credit derivative transactions

The table below shows the amounts corresponding to transactions with credit derivatives used in intermediation activities:

Page 75

CHART 6: EAD for derivatives broken down by risk

TABLE 28: Counterparty risk. Transactions with credit derivatives used in intermediation activities

																		12/31/2014
		Total notional amount of the transactions				Types of Derivatives
(millions of euros) Classification of derivatives						(CDS) on individual names				On indexes (CDSI)				Nth to default baskets				Derivatives on tranches (CDO)
Protection purchased			22,843				7,817				14,300				551				175
Protection sold			22,291				8,222				13,811				82				175
																		12/31/2013
		Total notional amount of the transactions				Types of Derivatives
(millions of euros) Classification of derivatives						(CDS) on individual names				On indexes (CDSI)				Nth to default baskets				Derivatives on tranches (CDO)
Protection purchased			20,692				9,381				10,173				652				486
Protection sold			20,387				9,802				10,027				75				483

As of year-end 2014 and 2013, the Group did not use credit derivatives in brokerage activities as collateral.

4.4. Information on the standardized approach

4.4.1. Identification of external rating agencies

The external credit assessment institutions (ECAIs) appointed by the Group to determine the risk weightings applicable to its exposures are the following: Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s, Fitch and DBRS.

The exposures for which the ratings of each ECAI are used are those corresponding to the wholesale portfolios, basically involving “Central Governments and Central Banks” in developed countries, and “Financial Institutions”.

In cases where a counterparty has ratings by different ECAIs, the Group follows the procedure laid down in Article 261 of the Solvency Regulations, which specifies the order of priority to be used in the assignment of ratings.

Page 76

When two different credit ratings made by designated ECAIs are available for a rated exposure, the higher risk weighting will be applied. However, when there are more than two credit ratings for the same rated exposure, use is to be made of the two credit ratings that provide the lowest risk weightings. If the two lowest risk weightings coincide, then that weighting will be applied; if they do not coincide, the higher of the two will be applied.

4.4.2. Assignment of the credit ratings of public share issues

The number of cases and the amount of these assignments is not relevant for the Group in terms of admission and management of issuer credit risk.

4.4.3. Exposure values before and after the application of credit risk mitigation techniques

The following table presents the amounts for net exposure, prior to the application of credit risk mitigation techniques, for different risk weightings and for the different exposure categories that correspond to the standardized method, excluding securitization positions:

TABLE 29: Standardized approach: Exposure values before the application of credit risk mitigation techniques

																														12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Exposure net of allowances for losses Risk weighting																												Total
		0%				20%				35%				50%				75%				100%				150%
Central governments or central banks			78,440				1,009				—				6,194				—				5,223				13,043				103,909
Regional governments or local authorities			32				4,321				—				1,303				—				1,811				—				7,467
Public sector entities			115				286				—				3,275				—				1,820				—				5,496
Multilateral Development Banks			50				1				—				29				—				13				—				93
International organizations			16				—				—				—				—				—				—				16
Institutions (2)			2,839				15,018				—				1,734				—				664				89				20,344
Corporates			—				7,649				—				1,730				3,972				94,321				73				107,744
Retail			—				—				—				—				59,369				137				—				59,506
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			—				—				46,118				6,262				—				1,768				—				54,147
Exposures in default			—				—				—				—				—				5,359				512				5,870
Items associated with particularly high risk			—				32				—				—				68				249				—				349
Covered bonds			—				605				—				—				—				—				—				605
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			—				1,765				—				5				—				289				3				2,063
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			—				120				—				—				—				5				—				124
Other exposures			8,178				600				—				—				31				18,198				14				27,020
TOTAL (1)			89,669				31,406				46,118				20,532				63,439				129,856				13,733				394,754

Notes:

(1) It does not include securitization positions.

(2) Exposure with 0% weighting corresponds to institution exposure with central counterparty

																														12/31/2013
(millions of euros)		Exposure net of allowances for losses Risk weighting
	Category of exposure		0%				20%				35%				50%				75%				100%				150%							Total
Central governments or central banks			72,104				714				—				4,882				1				15,801				—				93,502
Regional governments or local authorities			855				6,387				—				1,330				1				622				—				9,195
Public sector entities			1,180				1,495				0				114				3				1,694				—				4,486
Multilateral Development Banks			34				0				—				16				0				—				—				50
International organizations			8				—				—				—				0				—				—				8
Institutions (2)			593				15,641				—				2,881				3				1,570				3				20,690
Corporates			—				3,574				—				694				—				88,189				42				92,499
Retail			—				—				854				—				59,452				22				—				60,328
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			—				—				43,681				6,231				—				1,889				—				51,801
Exposures in default			—				—				—				1,684				—				5,656				3,334				10,674
Items associated with particularly high risk			—				—				—				—				11				513				594				1,118
Covered bonds			—				911				—				—				—				—				—				911
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			—				542				—				7				114				—				1				663
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			—				—				—				—				0				816				—				816
Other exposures			9,247				441				—				1				163				12,249				11				22,112
TOTAL (1)			84,020				29,705				44,535				17,839				59,749				129,019				3,985				368,852

Notes:

(1) It does not include securitization positions.

(2) Exposure with 0% weighting corresponds to institution exposure with central counterparty

The tables below show exposure amounts after the application of credit risk mitigation techniques, for different risk weightings and for the different categories of risk that correspond to the standardized method, excluding securitization positions:

Page 77

TABLE 30: Standardized approach: Exposure values after the application of credit risk mitigation techniques

																														12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Fully adjusted value of the exposure (1) Risk weighting
		0%				20%				35%				50%				75%				100%				150%				Total
Central governments or central banks			82,210				2,235				—				6,194				—				5,223				13,043				108,904
Regional governments or local authorities			32				4,242				—				1,302				—				1,811				—				7,387
Public sector entities			675				392				—				659				—				1,374				—				3,099
Multilateral Development Banks			50				1				—				29				—				13				—				93
International organizations			16				—				—				—				—				—				—				16
Institutions (3)			2,832				15,049				—				1,639				—				768				89				20,377
Corporates			—				7,668				—				1,723				3,183				89,500				68				102,143
Retail			—				—				—				—				57,049				135				—				57,185
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			—				6				45,002				6,197				—				1,278				—				52,482
Exposures in default			—				—				—				—				—				4,781				463				5,244
Items associated with particularly high risk			—				15				—				—				59				134				—				208
Covered bonds			—				605				—				—				—				—				—				605
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			—				1,765				—				5				—				61				3				1,834
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			—				46				—				—				—				5				—				51
Other exposures			13,371				1,042				46				—				31				16,965				14				31,468
TOTAL (2)			99,185				33,065				45,047				17,748				60,322				122,048				13,680				391,096

Notes

(1) It is defined as the value of the exposure net of provisions, following the application of risk mitigation techniques

(2) It does not include securitization positions.

(3) Exposure with 0% weighting corresponds to institution exposure with central counterparty

																														12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		Fully adjusted value of the exposure (1) Risk weighting
		0%				20%				35%				50%				75%				100%				150%				Total
Central governments or central banks			70,222				2,136				—				4,882				1				15,801				—				93,042
Regional governments or local authorities			875				4,024				—				1,330				1				618				—				6,847
Public sector entities			1,638				1,570				0				128				3				1,490				—				4,829
Multilateral Development Banks			34				0				—				16				0				—				—				50
International organizations			8				—				—				—				0				—				—				8
Institutions (3)			593				15,462				—				2,882				96				1,298				3				20,334
Corporates			—				3,574				—				571				—				82,673				33				86,852
Retail			—				—				851				—				56,475				20				—				57,346
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			—				—				42,850				6,178				—				1,437				—				50,465
Exposures in default			—				—				—				1,253				—				5,351				2,125				8,728
Items associated with particularly high risk			—				—				—				—				11				338				581				930
Covered bonds			—				911				—				—				—				—				—				911
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			—				542				—				6				—				114				1				663
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			—				—				—				—				0				261				—				261
Other exposures			14,579				839				52				1				165				11,964				11				27,612
TOTAL (2)			87,949				29,058				43,753				17,247				56,753				121,364				2,755				358,879

Notes

(1) It is defined as the value of the exposure net of provisions, following the application of risk mitigation techniques

(2) It does not include securitization positions.

(3) Exposure with 0% weighting corresponds to institution exposure with central counterparty

The following table presents the main variations in the period in terms of RWAs for the Credit Risk standardized approach:

TABLE 31: Variations in the period in terms of RWAs for the Credit Risk standardized approach

€ million
Credit Risk (SA)
RWAs Dec 13			166,188
Effects
Activity			12,847
Changes in RW			3,800
Regulatory changes			9,229
Model roll-out			-13,102
Exchange rate			-1,613
Other			77
RWAs Dec 14			177,425

* Does not include exposure to securitizations or equity, which are explained below.

Page 78

The main changes during this year are basically due to:

• Activity: General growth in the portfolios corresponding to Latin America and the United States.

• Changes in RW: Increase in the risk weightings due to downgrades in Venezuela and Argentina

• Regulatory changes: Fundamentally due to the new regulatory requirements derived from the limits associated with deferred tax assets (DTAs).

• Model roll-out: Produced by the transfer to advanced corporate portfolio models of both BBVA S.A. and Bancomer.

• Exchange rate: The variation is produced by the net effect of the general depreciation of the euro against foreign currencies except for the Venezuelan bolivar, whose trend is contrary; thus the impact on RWAs is netted as described in section 1.5.4.2 of this document.

4.5. Information on the IRB method

4.5.1. General information

4.5.1.1. Authorization by the Bank of Spain for the use of the IRB method

The following is a list of the models authorized by the Bank of Spain for the purpose of their use in the calculation of capital requirements.

TABLE 32: Models authorized by the Bank of Spain for the purpose of their use in the calculation of capital requirements

Institution		Portfolio
BBVA S.A.*		Financial institutions
		Public institutions
		Specialized finance Developers
		Small Corporates
		Medium-sized Corporates
		Large Corporates
		Mortgages
		Consumer finance
		Credit cards
BBVA Ireland		Financial institutions
		Large Corporates
BBVA Bancomer		Retail Revolving (Credit Cards)
		Large Corporates
		Medium-sized Corporates
BBVA Group		Equity

* Includes Uno-e

Page 79

The approval of the models by the Bank of Spain includes both own estimations of the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and the internal estimation of credit conversion factors (CCFs).

In 2014 the Group obtained supervisory authorization to calculate its own requirements for credit risk under the IRB approach for the portfolio of small corporates in BBVA S.A. and the portfolio of large and medium-sized corporates in BBVA Bancomer. The Group maintains its calendar established for receiving approval for additional Advanced Internal Models in different types of risks and geographical areas.

4.5.1.2. Structure of internal rating systems and relationship between internal and external ratings

The Group has rating tools for each one of the exposure categories listed in the Basel Accord.

The retail portfolio has scoring tools for determining the credit quality of transactions on the basis of information on the transaction itself and on the customer. The scoring models are algorithms calculated using statistical methods that score each transaction. This score reflects the transaction’s level of risk and is in direct relation to its probability of default (PD).

These decision models are the basic tool for deciding who should receive a loan and the amount to be granted, thereby contributing to both the arrangement and management of retail-type loans.

For the wholesale portfolio, the Group has rating tools that, unlike scorings, do not assess transactions but rather, customers. The Group has different tools for rating the various customer segments: small corporates, corporates, government and other government agencies, etc. In those wholesale portfolios where the number of defaults is very low (sovereign risks, corporates, financial institutions) the internal information is supplemented by the benchmarks of external rating agencies.

The PD estimates made by the Group are transferred to the Master Scale, enabling a comparison to be made with the scales used by external agencies. This is shown below.

Page 80

TABLE 33: Master Scale of BBVA’s rating

		Probability of default (in basis points)
Internal reduced-list ratings (17 groups)		Average				Minimum from >=				Maximum
AAA			1				—				2
AA+			2				2				3
AA			3				3				4
AA-			4				4				5
A+			5				5				6
A			8				6				9
A-			10				9				11
BBB+			14				11				17
BBB			20				17				24
BBB-			31				24				39
BB+			51				39				67
BB			88				67				116
BB-			150				116				1 94
B +			255				194				335
B			441				335				581
B-			785				581				1,061
CCC+			1,191				1.061				1.336
CCC			1,500				1,336				1.684
CCC-			1,890				1,684				2,121
CC+			2,381				2.121				2,673
CC			3,000				2.673				3,367
CC-			3,780				3.367				4,243

4.5.1.3. Use of internal estimations for purposes other than the calculation of capital requirements

The Group’s internal estimates are a vital component of management based on value creation, providing criteria for assessing the risk-return trade-off.

These measures have a broad range of uses, from the adoption of strategic business decisions through to the individual admission of transactions.

Specifically, internal estimates are used in everyday business in support of credit risk management through their inclusion in admission and monitoring processes, as well as in the pricing of transactions.

The management use of performance metrics that consider expected loss, economic capital and risk-adjusted return enables the monitoring of portfolios and the assessment of non-performing positions, among others.

Page 81

4.5.1.4. Process for managing and recognizing the effects of credit risk mitigation

The Group uses risk mitigation techniques for exposures pertaining to the wholesale portfolio by replacing the obligor’s PD with that of the guarantor, in those cases in which the latter is eligible and their PD is lower than the obligor’s.

In retail admission processes, the scoring contains the effect of the guarantor, and the recovery flows that are forthcoming throughout the cycle reflect the recoveries related to the collaterals associated with the contracts. This means that the effect of the collaterals is taken into account in the actual estimation of the loss given default for retail portfolios.

4.5.1.5. Mechanisms used for controlling internal rating systems

The entity carries out the control and monitoring of the rating systems and metrics for risk management for private individuals, SMEs and the self-employed, corporates and institutions. The activities are carried out, within certain analytical and qualitative fields, by realizing periodic 360º monitoring of all impacts of the tools as well as their internal function in terms of efficiency and effectiveness.

Global understanding of the systems allows action plans to be established, with a follow-up to ensure their proper execution. The weaknesses of the rating tools are thus identified and managed. The monitoring function is the main driving force of new developments and evolving maintenance, which allow the business interests of the entity to be aligned with regulatory requirements and management needs within a framework of analytical, technical and technological capacities.

In general, there is a series of corporate management programs that establish the main lines and minimum contents determining the management and/or supervision of the different credit risk models, as well as defining the metrics for their correct control.

More specifically, these corporate management programs will be adjusted to each of the rating tools of a business area within a time horizon adapted to the nature of the tool. Periodically, an overall monitoring and review of compliance with the thresholds agreed under the management program will be carried out to detect situations that could potentially require an adjustment to the models and/or credit policies and to take early corrective actions to minimize the impact of such situations.

Analysis, in the methodological sphere, is defined as the monitoring of the predictive capabilities of the models, backtesting calibration of the parameters, proper granularity and concentration, sample stability of input, as well as traceability, integrity and consistency.

The use of rating systems by the different areas is overseen from the context of integration in management. This context defines parameter sensitivity tests, stress-tests of estimates, proper use of the parameters in the portfolio management to facilitate decision-making, control of exposure without rating, risk policies and the framework for delegating tasks, structures of decision-making committees, implementation risk evaluation, proper technological environment, evaluation of the inclusion of the parameters in corporate applications, proper follow-up of the training of users to collateral its proper implementation and full comprehension, follow-up of the correct structure and quality of documentation, as well as all other activities that ensure the proper use of management metrics.

Apart from the corporate management programs mentioned above, access to the internal rating systems is based on IT system-authorized profiles that ensure only the customer loan management supervisors can see the scoring and rating.

Page 82

Control of the capital process is performed by risk units that are independent of the units that calculate the scoring and rating and which, therefore, are users of the internal rating system. These control mechanisms are established at different levels of the process, such as at input, execution and final outputs, and involve both the integrity of the data and their accuracy and correctness.

4.5.1.6. Description of the internal rating process

There follows a description of the internal classification processes according to each customer category:

• Central banks and central governments: For this segment, the assignment of ratings is made by the Risk units appointed for this purpose, which periodically analyze this type of customers, rating them according to the parameters included in the corresponding rating model. This model comprises different tools depending on the type of country: developed, emerging or peripheral. Sovereign ratings are generated in local and foreign currency for these three tools, as well as a transfer rating, which evaluates the risk of inconvertibility/transfer restrictions.

In general the rating obtained is based on the ratings of external agencies, where they exist, except for the emerging economies tool in foreign currency. In this case, the ratings are calculated based on an in-house model that establishes a relationship between the score given to each country by the corresponding unit and the empirical PD of the rating agencies. This classifies the countries on the BBVA master scale.

In the case of emerging countries with presence of BBVA subsidiaries or branches, the rating in local currency is adjusted to that obtained by the emerging countries tool under the authorization of the Risk Committee assigned for this purpose.

• Institutions: The rating of Public Institutions is generally provided by the risk units responsible for their approval, on a yearly basis, coinciding with the review of customer risk or with the reporting of their accounts.

In the case of Financial Institutions, the Risk unit responsible makes a regular assessment of this type of customer, continuously monitoring their evolution on domestic and international markets. External ratings are a key factor in assigning ratings for financial institutions.

• Large Corporates: Includes the rating of exposures with corporate business groups. The result is affected both by indicators of business risk (evaluation of the competitive environment, business positioning, regulation, etc.) and financial risk indicators (size of the group by sales, cash generation, levels of debt, financial flexibility, etc.).

In accordance with the characteristics of the large corporates segment, the rating model is global in nature with specific algorithms by sector of activity and geographical adaptations. The rating of these customers is generally calculated within the framework of the annual risk review process, or the admission of new operations. The responsibility for the assessment lies with the units originating the risk, while those approving it validate it when the decision is taken.

• Medium-sized Corporates: This segment also takes into account quantitative factors derived from economic and financial information, and qualitative factors that are related to the age of the company, the sector, management quality, etc. and alert factors derived from risk monitoring. As in the Corporate segment, the rating tends to run parallel to the admission process, so the responsibility for rating lies with the unit proposing the risk, while the decision-making level is in charge of validating it.

Page 83

• Small Corporates: As in the case of medium-sized companies, this segment also takes into account quantitative factors derived from economic and financial information, and qualitative factors that are related to the age of the company, the sector, management quality, etc. and alert factors derived from risk monitoring. Similarly, the rating tends run parallel with the admission process, so the responsibility for rating is with the unit proposing the risk, while the decision-making level is in charge of validating it.

• Specialist Finance: For classifying this segment, the Group has chosen to apply the supervisory slotting criteria approach, as included in the Basel Accord of June 2004 and in the Solvency Regulations.

• Developers: The rating of real-estate developers allows the rating of both the customers who are developers and the individual real-estate projects. Its use makes it easier to monitor and rate projects during their execution phase, as well as enriching the admission processes.

• BBVA Bancomer companies: This segment also takes into account quantitative factors derived from economic and financial information and bureau information, as well as qualitative factors related to the age of the company, the sector, the quality of its management, etc. The rating tends to run parallel to the admission process, so that responsibility for the rating is with the unit originating the risk, while the decision-making body validates it.

In general in the wholesale area, the rating of customers is not limited to admission, as the ratings are updated according to new information available at any time (economic and financial data, changes in the company, external factors, etc.)

• Retail: This has been broken down into each one of the exposure categories referred to by the correlations provided for in the sections defined in the Solvency Regulations.

One of the most important processes in which scoring is fully integrated at the highest level and in all decision-making areas is the Group’s process for approving retail transactions. Scoring is an important factor for the analysis and resolution of transactions and it is a mandatory requirement to include it in decision-making on risk in those segments for which it has been designed. In the process of marketing and approving retail transactions, the manager is responsible for marketing management, the quality of the risk and the return, in other words, the customer’s comprehensive management, attending to the processes of admission, monitoring and control.

The rating process is as follows for each specific category of retail exposure:

• Mortgages, consumer finance and retail credit cards—Spain: The manager collects data on the customer (personal, financial, banking relationship information) and on the operation (LTV, amount, maturity, destination etc.) and calculates the rating of the transaction with the scoring. The decision of whether it is approved is made based on the results issued by the model.

• Autos Finanzia: The financing application may enter through the call center or be directly recorded in Finanzianet by our authorized dealers. The necessary information on the customer (personal, financial information, authorization of the consult from the external bureau of credit) and on the transaction (maturity, amount, etc.) is recorded to rate the transaction with the scoring. Once the validity of the information provided is obtained, the decision of whether to approve it is made based on the results issued by the model.

Page 84

• Retail Revolving (BBVA Bancomer credit cards): The manager or specialist party gathers the necessary information on the customer (personal, financial information and authorization of the consult from the external bureau of credit) and on the transaction (limit requested) to rate the transaction with the scoring. There are additional processes for validating and checking this information through the back office or operational support areas. The decision of whether it is approved is made based on the results issued by the model.

• Proactive - Spain: Each month all the customers who have asset positions in credit cards, consumer finance or mortgages and liabilities positions in credit cards and consumer finance, are rated according to information on their behavior.

• Equity: For its portfolio position registered as equity, the Group is applying the rating obtained for customers as a result of their classification in the lending process.

4.5.1.7. Definitions, methods and data for estimating and validating risk parameters

The estimation of the parameters is based on the uniform definition of default established at Group level. Specifically, for a contract or customer to be considered in a situation of default, the provisions of section 4.1.1 must be met, in line with current regulations.

Specifically, there are two approaches within the Group for considering default and estimating parameters:

• The contract-level approach is applied within the sphere of retail risk. Each customer transaction is dealt with as an independent unit in terms of credit risk. Therefore, non-compliance with credit obligations to the bank is handled at the transaction level, regardless of the behavior of the customer with respect to other obligations.

• The customer-level approach is applied to the remainder of the portfolio. The significant unit for defining default is the customer’s sum of contracts, which enter a situation of default en masse when the customer defaults.

In addition, to avoid including defaults for small amounts in the estimations, defaulted volumes are to pass through a materiality filter that depends on the type of customer and transaction.

Estimating parameters

In the case of Spain and Mexico, the Group has an RAR information system that reflects exposure to credit risk in the Group’s different portfolios included in advanced internal models.

This information system collaterals the availability of historical data recorded by the Group, which are used to estimate the parameters of Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default (LGD) and Credit Conversion Factors (CCF). These are then used to calculate the regulatory capital using the advanced measurement approach, economic capital and expected loss by credit risk. Other sources of information for the Bank may be used in addition, depending on any new needs detected in the estimation process. Internal estimations of the PD, LGD and CCF parameters are made for all the Group’s portfolios.

In the case of low default portfolios (LDP), in which the number of defaults tends to be insufficient for obtaining empirical estimates, use is made of data from external agencies that are merged with the internal information available and expert criteria.

Page 85

The following shows the estimation methodologies used for the PD, LGD and CCF risk parameters, for the purpose of calculating the capital requirements.

a. Probability of default (PD)

The methodology used for estimating the PD in those cases that have a mass of internal data of sufficient size is based on the creation of pools of exposures. The groups proposed with a view to calibration are defined by pooling contracts together seeking to achieve intra-group uniformity in terms of credit quality and differentiation with all the other risk groups. The largest possible number of pools is defined in order to allow a suitable discrimination of risk. The basic metric used for making these groupings is the score, being supplemented by other metrics relevant to PD that are proven to be sufficiently discriminating depending on the portfolio.

Once the pools of exposures have been defined, the average empirical PD recorded for each one is obtained and adjusted to the cycle. This metric provides stable estimates over the course of the economic cycle, referred to as PD-TTC (Through the Cycle). This calculation considers the portfolio’s track record and provides long-term levels of PD.

In low default portfolios (LDPs) the empirical PDs observed by external credit assessment institutions are used to obtain the PD of internal risk groups.

Finally, in customer-focused portfolios there is a Master Scale, which is simply a standard and uniform rule for credit levels that makes it possible to make comparisons of credit quality in the Group’s different portfolios.

b. Loss given default (LGD)

As a general rule, the method used to estimate LGD in portfolios with a sufficient number of defaults called the Workout LGD. Here, the LGD of a contract is obtained as a quotient of the sum of all the financial flows recorded during the recovery process that takes place when a transaction defaults, and the transaction’s exposure at the time of the default.

This estimate is made by considering all the historical data recorded in internal systems. When making the estimates, there are transactions that have already defaulted but for which the recovery process is still ongoing. The loss given default recorded at the time of the estimate is therefore higher than it will ultimately be. The necessary adjustments are made in these cases so as not to distort the estimate.

These estimates are made by defining uniform risk groups in terms of the nature of the operations that determine loss given default. They are made in such a way that there are enough groups for each one to be distinguishable and receive a different estimate.

In keeping with the guidelines set out by the rules, the estimates are made by distinguishing between wholesale and retail type exposures.

There is insufficient historical experience to make a robust estimation in low default portfolios (LDP) using the Workout LGD method, so external sources of information are used, combined with internal data to provide the portfolio with a representative rate of loss given default.

The loss given default rates estimated according to the internal databases the Group holds are conditioned to the moment of the cycle of the data window used, since loss given default varies over the economic cycle. Hence, two concepts can be defined: long-term loss given default, referred to as Long-Run LGD (LRLGD), and loss given default in a period of stress in the cycle, called Downturn LGD (DLGD).

Page 86

LRLGD is calculated by making an adjustment to capture the difference between the loss given default obtained empirically with the available sample and the average loss given default observed throughout the economic cycle if the observation is complete.

In addition, the LGD observed in a period of stress in the economic cycle (DLGD) is determined.

These estimates are made for those portfolios whose loss given default is noticeably sensitive to the cycle. The different ways in which the recovery cycles can conclude are determined for each portfolio where this LGD in conditions of stress has not yet been observed, and the level these parameters would have in a downturn situation are estimated.

c. Credit conversion factor (CCF)

As with the two preceding parameters, the exposure at the moment of default is another of the necessary inputs for calculating expected loss and regulatory capital. A contract’s exposure usually coincides with its balance. However, this does not hold true in all cases. For example, for those products with explicit limits, such as credit cards or credit lines, the exposure should incorporate the potential increase in the balance that may be recorded up to the time of default.

In observance of regulatory requirements, exposure is calculated as the drawn balance, which is the real risk at any specific moment, plus a percentage (CCF) of the undrawn balance, which is the part that the customer can still use until the available limit is reached. Therefore, the CCF is defined as the percentage of the undrawn balance that is expected to be used before default occurs.

CCF is estimated by using the cohort approach, analyzing how the exposure varies from a pre-established reference date through to the moment of default, obtaining the average performance according to the relevant metrics.

Different approaches are used for wholesale and retail type exposures. The contract approach analyzes the exposure’s evolution until the contract’s moment of breach of contract, whereas the customer approach analyzes the exposure’s evolution through to the moment of breach by the customer.

Once again, in low default portfolios (LDP) there is insufficient historical experience to make a reliable calculation with the Workout LGD method defined. In this case, too, use is made of external sources that are combined with internal data to provide a representative CCF of the portfolio.

4.5.2. Exposure values by category and obligor grade

The following table presents the information on credit risk by method of internal classifications (IRB) by obligor grade for the different categories of exposure. The information shown is balance-sheet volume, off-balance-sheet volume, exposure, EAD, PD-TTC and Downturn LGD and RW (internal estimates approved by the Bank of Spain):

Page 87

TABLE 34: Advanced measurement approach: Exposure values by category and obligor grade

																														12/31/2014
(millions of euros) Categories of Exposure		On balance sheet reasigned exposure (1)				Off balance sheet reasigned exposure (2)				Exposure reassigned (3) (1+2)				EAD (4)				PD-TTC (%)				DLGD (%)				RWA				RW (%)
Central governments or central banks			4,153				749				4,902				4,529				1.3	%			35	%			376				8.31	%
From AAA to AA-			2,335				188				2,523				2,433				0.0	%			30	%			64				2.63	%
From A+ to A-			1,278				464				1,742				1,509				0.1	%			41	%			65				4.31	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			316				59				375				345				0.1	%			43	%			27				7.71	%
From BB+ to BB-			110				30				141				124				1.1	%			30	%			74				59.73	%
From B+ to B-			15				0				16				16				5.5	%			27	%			8				52.85	%
C			51				5				56				54				13.2	%			54	%			132				245.72	%
D			47				2				49				48				100.0	%			19	%			6				13.42	%
Institutions			105,642				6,338				111,981				109,494				0.5	%			17	%			12,425				11.35	%
From AAA to AA-			20,240				511				20,750				20,554				0.0	%			14	%			401				1.95	%
From A+ to A-			43,966				2,046				46,012				45,088				0.1	%			17	%			2,855				6.33	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			33,505				3,075				36,580				35,552				0.2	%			18	%			6,007				16.89	%
From BB+ to BB-			5,660				631				6,291				5,990				0.7	%			16	%			1,604				26.77	%
From B+ to B-			1,634				57				1,691				1,663				3.3	%			15	%			624				37.52	%
C			425				4				429				427				20.7	%			38	%			892				209.07	%
D			213				14				227				220				100.0	%			51	%			42				19.26	%
Corporates			75,120				53,389				128,508				102,682				12.1	%			41	%			60,998				59.40	%
Of which: SMEs			15,623				2,732				18,356				16,890				39	%			44	%			11,084				65.62	%
From AAA to AA-			11				0				11				11				0	%			17	%			1				8.08	%
From A+ to A-			252				241				493				354				0	%			49	%			80				22.67	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			1,323				729				2,052				1,661				0	%			50	%			648				39.02	%
From BB+ to BB-			3,304				951				4,255				3,756				1	%			47	%			2,747				73.13	%
From B+ to B-			4,125				502				4,628				4,366				5	%			37	%			4,665				106.85	%
C			441				26				467				454				17	%			39	%			754				165.97	%
D			6,166				283				6,449				6,289				100	%			47	%			2,190				34.82	%
Of which: Other			48,402				48,809				97,211				73,596				6	%			40	%			39,394				53.53	%
From AAA to AA-			412				2,413				2,826				1,616				0	%			44	%			178				10.98	%
From A+ to A-			6,602				8,190				14,792				10,678				0	%			42	%			2,707				25.36	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			18,456				27,536				45,992				32,876				0	%			41	%			13,218				40.21	%
From BB+ to BB-			12,759				8,598				21,357				17,298				1	%			38	%			12,687				73.34	%
From B+ to B-			6,161				1,344				7,505				6,757				5	%			37	%			8,239				121.93	%
C			498				324				822				682				16	%			40	%			1,399				204.99	%
D			3,513				404				3,917				3,688				100	%			37	%			966				26.20	%
Of which specialized finance:			11,095				1,847				12,942				12,196												10,520				86.26	%
Retail			83,698				12,577				96,276				86,866				6.4	%			28	%			21,059				24.24	%
Of which: Secured by real estate			69,880				233				70,113				69,892				6	%			19	%			10,420				14.91	%
From AAA to AA-			36,775				149				36,923				36,782				0	%			16	%			637				1.73	%
From A+ to A-			6,753				23				6,776				6,755				0	%			19	%			260				3.85	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			9,665				41				9,706				9,667				0	%			23	%			954				9.87	%
From BB+ to BB-			6,743				17				6,761				6,744				1	%			23	%			1,823				27.04	%
From B+ to B-			4,878				3				4,880				4,878				5	%			23	%			3,744				76.77	%
C			1,493				0				1,494				1,493				19	%			26	%			2,243				150.24	%
D			3,573				0				3,573				3,573				100	%			25	%			758				21.20	%
Of which: Eligible revolving			6,377				11,566				17,943				9,134				7	%			76	%			7,203				78.86	%
From AAA to AA-			403				2,112				2,515				1,071				0	%			41	%			12				1.13	%
From A+ to A-			63				262				326				167				0	%			47	%			4				2.34	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			371				999				1,370				541				0	%			72	%			62				11.42	%
From BB+ to BB-			1,472				4,071				5,543				2,185				1	%			81	%			717				32.80	%
From B+ to B-			3,092				3,633				6,725				4,071				5	%			84	%			4,273				104.96	%
C			803				489				1,292				927				24	%			80	%			2,050				221.12	%
D			172				0				172				172				100	%			82	%			86				49.96	%
Of which: Other corporates			1,578				519				2,097				1,896				11	%			59	%			965				50.90	%
From AAA to AA-			3				0				3				3				0	%			40	%			0				4.17	%
From A+ to A-			1				1				2				1				0	%			49	%			0				10.88	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			135				103				238				196				0	%			55	%			44				22.33	%
From BB+ to BB-			628				246				874				778				1	%			57	%			374				48.03	%
From B+ to B-			612				161				773				715				4	%			57	%			498				69.67	%
C			27				5				32				30				18	%			60	%			31				101.47	%
D			172				3				174				173				100	%			77	%			18				10.58	%
Of which: Other non-corporates			5,863				259				6,123				5,943				8	%			51	%			2,471				41.58	%
From AAA to AA-			1,457				98				1,555				1,462				0	%			46	%			71				4.87	%
From A+ to A-			332				16				349				333				0	%			53	%			38				11.37	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			770				26				796				780				0	%			58	%			206				26.39	%
From BB+ to BB-			1,026				65				1,091				1,062				1	%			55	%			618				58.20	%
From B+ to B-			1,700				50				1,750				1,726				5	%			46	%			1,247				72.23	%
C			230				3				233				230				21	%			52	%			272				118.44	%
D			349				0				349				350				100	%			64	%			19				5.36	%
Equity PD/LGD Method			6,462				0				6,462				6,462				0.3	%			87	%			10,417				155.47	%
From A+ to A-			0				0				0				0				0	%			0	%			0				0.00	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			6,016				0				6,016				6,016				0	%			90	%			9,285				154.33	%
From BB+ to BB-			118				0				118				118				1	%			65	%			206				174.55	%
From B+ to B-			236				0				236				236				3	%			65	%			556				236.21	%
C			93				0				93				93				38	%			65	%			370				399.64	%
TOTAL BY CATEGORY AND OBLIGOR GRADE			275,075				73,054				348,129				310,032				0.06	%			28	%			105,275				33.96	%

Notes

(2) Amount not used included in memorandum accounts corresponding mainly to sums undrawn from credit lines and cards, as well as exposures in letters of credit and documentary credits.

(3) This refers to exposure following the application of risk mitigation techniques.

(4) Value of the exposure in the event of default.

Page 88

																														12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Categories of Exposure		On balance sheet reasigned exposure (1)				Off balance sheet reasigned exposure (2)				Exposure reassigned (3) (1+2)				EAD (4)				PD-TTC (%)				DLGD (%)				RWA				RW (%)
Central governments or central banks			2,707				808				3,515				3,115				1.36				37.55				213				6.84	%
From AAA to AA-			1,097				153				1,250				1,177				0.02				31.14				37				3.14	%
From A+ to A-			1,147				527				1,674				1,409				0.10				42.57				7				0.52	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			337				104				441				389				0.17				40.02				32				8.11	%
From BB+ to BB-			53				22				75				64				0.79				21.47				46				72.47	%
From B+ to B-			37				0				37				37				6.52				42.99				55				148.16	%
C			0				0				0				0				21.16				40.23				0				228.57	%
D			36				2				38				37.22				100.00				46.43				36				95.42	%
Institutions			80,993				8,161				89,155				85,558				0.57				19.33				12,403				14.50	%
From AAA to AA-			11,242				415				11,657				11,459				0.04				17.78				246				2.15	%
From A+ to A-			37,307				1,464				38,771				38,189				0.08				17.43				2,346				6.14	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			24,221				6,010				30,231				27,534				0.25				23.71				6,437				23.38	%
From BB+ to BB-			6,516				215				6,731				6,640				0.79				13.65				1,731				26.06	%
From B+ to B-			1,122				40				1,162				1,142				3.54				13.29				501				43.88	%
C			381				2				383				382				21.21				44.86				975				255.32	%
D			206				14				221				211.96				100.00				42.89				167				78.94	%
Corporates			63,196				49,507				112,703				89,644				14.09				40.60				56,098				62.58	%
Of which: Total exposures assigned to obligor grades or pools of exposures.			52,388				47,165				99,553				77,454				14.09				40.60				44,931				58.01	%
From AAA to AA-			983				2,660				3,643				2,334				0.03				39.45				251				10.77	%
From A+ to A-			3,354				11,897				15,251				9,510				0.08				42.33				2,305				24.24	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			17,547				21,872				39,419				29,335				0.22				36.98				10,085				34.38	%
From BB+ to BB-			10,812				7,512				18,324				15,002				0.73				41.00				10,044				66.95	%
From B+ to B-			8,489				1,951				10,441				9,479				5.04				40.51				11,956				126.13	%
C			1,616				394				2,010				1,808				14.70				38.31				3,205				177.26	%
D			9,587				879				10,465				9,987				100.00				49.74				7,084				70.94	%
Of which: Specialist finance			10,808				2,341				13,149				12,190												11,167				91.61	%
Retail			84,850				11,186				96,037				86,750				7.15				20.13				22,957				26.46	%
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			72,446				383				72,829				72,470				6.85				14.21				12,727				17.56	%
From AAA to AA-			26,246				231				26,477				26,261				0.03				11.00				296				1.13	%
From A+ to A-			12,570				46				12,616				12,573				0.07				11.86				298				2.37	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			12,286				73				12,359				12,291				0.23				15.30				896				7.29	%
From BB+ to BB-			9,877				27				9,903				9,879				0.83				16.23				1,874				18.97	%
From B+ to B-			4,968				4				4,972				4,968				5.68				19.85				3,503				70.50	%
C			2,393				2				2,395				2,393				18.78				21.02				2,846				118.92	%
D			4,106				—				4,106				4,106				100.00				22.97				3,015				73.43	%
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			6,544				10,616				17,160				9,273				6.90				77.26				7,650				82.50	%
From AAA to AA-			271				1,773				2,044				794				0.03				41.94				9				1.14	%
From A+ to A-			96				344				440				199				0.06				42.70				5				2.34	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			367				1,019				1,386				542				0.27				67.85				58				10.72	%
From BB+ to BB-			1,711				3,844				5,555				2,498				1.01				79.44				819				32.80	%
From B+ to B-			2,998				3,018				6,016				3,959				5.00				84.37				4,205				106.23	%
C			928				617				1,545				1,110				21.88				81.82				2,444				220.17	%
D			172				1				172				172				100.00				85.11				110				63.97	%
Of which: Other retail assets			5,860				187				6,048				5,006				11.98				45.27				2,580				51.53	%
From AAA to AA-			895				—				896				895				0.03				45.73				45				5.03	%
From A+ to A-			214				—				215				214				0.07				59.24				24				11.42	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			628				56				683				656				0.22				57.48				172				26.21	%
From BB+ to BB-			1,337				66				1,404				417				0.87				56.17				238				56.99	%
From B+ to B-			2,056				48				2,104				2,086				4.85				33.52				1,574				75.44	%
C			312				16				328				320				23.54				51.58				383				119.92	%
D			417				1				419				417.91				100.00				60.98				144				34.41	%
Equity PD/LGD Method			7,516				—				7,516				7,516				0.39				81.34				9,872				131.36	%
From A+ to A-			238				—				238				238				0.09				65.00				166				69.66	%
From BBB+ to BBB-			6,646				—				6,646				6,646				0.19				83.28				8,254				124.19	%
From BB+ to BB-			299				—				299				299				0.83				69.41				572				191.60	%
From B+ to B-			332				—				332				332				4.32				65.00				880				264.94	%
TOTAL BY CATEGORY AND OBLIGOR GRADE			239,262				69,662				308,925				272,582				7.13				28.51				101,543				35.83	%

Notes

(2) Amount not used included in memorandum accounts corresponding mainly to sums undrawn from credit lines and cards, as well as exposures in letters of credit and documentary credits.

(3) This refers to exposure following the application of risk mitigation techniques.

(4) Value of the exposure in the event of default.

The information contained in the above tables is set out below in graphic format:

Page 89

CHART 7: Advanced measurement approach: EAD by obligor category

CHART 8: Advanced measurement approach: Average weighted PD by EAD

Page 90

CHART 9: Advanced measurement approach: Average weighted DLGD by EAD

CHART 10: Advanced measurement approach: Average weighted risk by EAD

The following table presents the main variations in the year in terms of RWAs for the Credit Risk advanced measurement approach:

Page 91

TABLE 35: Variations in the period in terms of RWAs for the Credit Risk advanced measurement approach

€ million
Credit risk (IRB)
RWA Dec 13			92,200
Effects
Activity			-1,382
Changes in RW			-8.094
Regulatory changes			1,418
Model roll-out			11,085
Exchange rate			1.729
Other			-2,098
RWA Dec 14			94,858

The main changes during this year are basically due to:

• Activity: Net effect of the trend in credit activity in Spain and Mexico.

• Changes in RW: Reduction in the weightings after the process of calibration and updating of the parameters, together with the use of new rating and scoring tools.

• Regulatory changes: Basically due to the new elements related to the application of adjustments due to asset correlation.

• Model roll-out: Caused by the entry into advanced portfolio models of both BBVA S.A. and Bancomer companies.

• Exchange rate: Due basically to the depreciation of the euro against the Mexican peso, which has resulted in an increase in EAD and thus in the RWAs, as explained in section 1.5.4.2 of this document.

• Other: Fall caused by the phased-in application of the support factor for SMEs by the other geographical areas where the Group is present.

4.5.3. Comparative analysis of the estimates made

The following charts compare the expected loss adjusted to the cycle calculated according to the Group’s core internal models approved by the Bank of Spain, with the effective loss incurred between 2001 and 2014. They also present the average effective loss between 2001 and 2014 in accordance with the following:

• Estimated expected loss calculated with the internal models calibrated to 2014, and adjusted to the economic cycle (light green line), i.e. the annual average expected loss in an economic cycle.

Page 92

• Effective loss (light blue dotted line) calculated as the ratio of gross additions to NPA over the average observed exposure multiplied by the estimated point in time severity.²

• Effective average loss (2001-2014), which is the average of effective losses for each year (light blue solid line).

The effective loss is the annual loss incurred. It must be less than the expected loss adjusted to the cycle in the best years of an economic cycle, and greater during years of crisis.

The comparison has been made for the portfolios of Mortgages, Consumer Finance, Credit Cards (2004-2014 window) and Automobiles (retail) and SMEs and Developers, all of them in Spain and Portugal. In Mexico, the comparison has been carried out for the Credit Card portfolio (2005-2014 window) and SMEs and Large Companies (2006-2014 window). In the categories of Institutions (Public and Financial Institutions) and Corporate, historical experience shows that there is such a small number of defaulted exposures (Low Default Portfolios) that it is not statistically significant, and hence the comparison is not shown.

The charts show that during the years of biggest economic growth, in general the effective loss was significantly lower than the expected loss adjusted to the cycle calculated using internal models.

The contrary was the case after the start of the crisis. This is in line with the major economic slowdown and the financial difficulties of households and companies, above all in the case of developers and construction companies.

The fact that in some portfolios the average observed loss is greater than the estimated loss is coherent with the fact that the observed time window may be worse than what would be expected in a complete economic cycle. In fact, this window has fewer expansive years (6) than crisis years (8). This is not representative of a complete economic cycle.

Retail Mortgages:

²  The LGD (PIT) methodology allows for a better approximation of observed losses. For more recent years, given that the recovery processes have not concluded, the best estimate of final LGD is included.

Page 93

CHART 11: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Retail mortgages

Starting in 2007, the effective losses are above the expected loss adjusted to the cycle, as they are losses incurred in years of crisis. However, the average of effective losses in this period is notably lower than that adjusted to the cycle. This demonstrates the conservative nature of the estimate.

Consumer finance:

The chart shows that during the years of biggest economic growth the effective loss was lower than the expected loss adjusted to the cycle calculated using internal models. The contrary was the case starting in 2007. This is in line with the major economic slowdown and the financial difficulties of households.

Page 94

CHART 12: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Consumer finance

Credit cards.

As in the case of Mortgages and Consumer Finance, the observed loss is lower than the Expected Loss adjusted to the cycle calculated using internal models at best periods of the cycle, and higher during its worst periods.

CHART 13: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Credit cards

Page 95

Automobiles:

In this case the expected loss adjusted to the cycle continues to be higher than the average effective losses for the last 14 years, which suggests the conservative nature of the estimate.

CHART 14: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Automobiles

SMEs and Developers:

Once again it can be seen that during the years of biggest economic growth the effective loss is lower than the expected loss adjusted to the cycle calculated using internal models. The contrary was the case starting in 2007. The great difficulties faced by companies, particularly those engaged in development and construction businesses, are reflected in an observed loss higher than the loss adjusted to the cycle estimated by the internal models.

The expected loss adjusted to the cycle is lower than the average effective losses for the last 13 years, which is consistent with the fact that the observed window is worse than what would be expected over a complete economic cycle (more years of crisis than of economic boom).

Page 96

CHART 15: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: SMEs and Developers

Mexico Credit Cards:

In the case of Bancomer’s credit card portfolio we can see how the average Expected Loss for the cycle calculated using internal models is below the average observed losses. The reason is the use of an observation window which is unrepresentative of a complete economic cycle (the estimate would include comparatively more years of crisis than of economic growth).

Page 97

CHART 16: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Mexico Credit Cards

Mexico Corporates:

In the case of the Bancomer Corporates portfolio the average Expected Loss of the cycle calculated using internal models is slightly below the average of observed losses. The last two/three years would show a behavior that is very close to this average for the cycle, which corroborates the improvement observed in these portfolios with respect to the worst years of the crisis.

Page 98

CHART 17: Comparative analysis of expected and incurred loss: Mexico Corporates

4.5.3.1. Impairment losses

The table below shows the balance of specific, generic and country risk allowances for losses, by exposure categories, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013.

TABLE 36: Balance of specific, generic and country risk allowances for losses, by exposure category

(millions of euros) Categories of Exposure		Loan-loss provisions				Loan-loss provisions
		2014				2013
Central governments or central banks			4				2
Institutions			78				76
Corporates			6,711				6,717
Retail			1,620				1,566
Of which: Secured by real estate collateral			721				676
Of which: Qualifying revolving retail			516				532
Of which: Other retail assets			384				357
TOTAL			8,413				8,362

Page 99

4.5.4. Weightings of specialized lending exposures

The solvency regulation stipulates that the consideration of specialized lending companies is to apply to legal entities with the following characteristics:

• The exposure is to an entity created specifically to finance and/or operate physical assets

• The contractual arrangements give the lender a substantial degree of control over the assets and income they generate.

• The primary source of repayment of the obligation is the income generated by the assets being financed, rather than the independent capacity of the borrower.

The following table presents the exposures assigned to each one of the risk weightings of the specialized lending exposures as of December 31, 2014 and 2013:

TABLE 37: Exposures assigned to each one of the risk weightings of the specialized lending exposures

(millions of euros) Risk weighting		Scale				Original exposure (1)
						2014				2013
1			50	%			0				0
			70	%			6,158				5,536
2			70	%			0				0
			90	%			4,530				5,074
3			115	%			1,310				1,071
4			250	%			488				908
5			0	%			457				560
TOTAL							12,942				13,149

Note

(1) Gross exposure prior to the application of risk mitigation techniques.

4.5.5. Risk weightings of equity exposures

The following table presents the exposures assigned to each one of the risk weightings of equity exposures as of December 31, 2014 and 2013.

Page 100

TABLE 38: Exposures assigned to each one of the risk weightings of the equity exposures

(millions of euros) Risk weighting		Original exposure
		2014				2013
Risk Weighting, Simple Method			3,980				830
190%			479				596
250%			3,266				0
290%			134				140
370%			102				93
PD/LGD Method			6,462				7,613
AA			0				0
AA-			0				0
A			0				238
A-			0				0
BBB+			2,982				3,552
BBB			3,022				1,835
BBB-			12				1,260
BB+			40				231
BB			77				64
BB-			0				3
B+			233				15
B			3				317
B-			0				0
C			93				98
Internal Models Method			254				375
TOTAL			10,696				8,818

The main variations in the period are analyzed in section 7 of the report.

4.6. Information on securitizations

4.6.1. General characteristics of securitizations

4.6.1.1. Purpose of securitization

The Group’s current policy on securitization involves a program of recurrent issue, with a deliberate diversification of securitized assets that adjusts their volume to the Bank’s capital requirements and to market conditions.

This program is complemented by all the other finance and equity instruments, thereby diversifying the need to resort to wholesale markets.

The definition of the strategy and the execution of the operations, as with all other wholesale finance and capital management, is supervised by the Assets & Liabilities Committee, with the pertinent internal authorizations obtained directly from the Board of Directors or from the Executive Committee.

The main aim of securitization is to serve as an instrument for the efficient management of the balance sheet, above all as a source of liquidity at an efficient cost, obtaining liquid assets through eligible collateral, as a complement to other financial instruments. In addition, there are other secondary objectives associated with the use of securitization instruments, such as freeing up of regulatory capital by transferring risk and the freeing of potential excess generic provisions, provided that the volume of the first-loss tranche and the ability to transfer risk allow it.

Page 101

4.6.1.2. Functions pursued in the securitization process and degree of involvement

The Group’s degree of involvement in its securitization funds is not usually restricted to the mere role of assignor and administrator of the securitized portfolio.

CHART 18: Functions carried out in the securitization process and degree of involvement of the Group

As can be seen in the above chart, the Group has usually taken additional roles such as:

• Payment Agent.

• Provider of the treasury account.

• Provider of the subordinated loan and of the loan for start-up costs, with the former being the one that finances the first-loss tranche, and the latter financing the fund’s fixed expenditure.

• Administrative agent of the securitized portfolio

The Group has not assumed the role of sponsor of securitizations originated by third-party institutions.

The Group’s balance sheet maintains the first-loss tranches of all securitizations performed.

It is worth noting that the Group has not modified its model for the generation of securitization operations since the credit crunch, which began in July 2007. Accordingly:

• There have been no transfers of risk through synthetic securitizations. All operations have involved traditional securitizations with simple structures in which the underlying assets were loans or financial leasing.

• It has not been involved in recurrent structures such as conduits or SIVs. All its issues have been one-offs, with no mandatory commitments for asset repackaging or the replacement of loans.

Page 102

4.6.1.3. Methods used for the calculation of risk-weighted exposures in its securitization activity

The methods used to calculate risk-weighted exposures in securitizations are:

• The standardized approach: when this method is used for fully securitized exposures, in full or in a predominant manner if it involves a mixed portfolio.

• The IRB approach: when internal models are used for securitized exposures, in full or in a predominant manner. Within the alternatives of the IRB approach, use is made of the model based on external ratings.

4.6.2. Risk transfer in securitization activities

A securitization fulfills the criterion of significant and effective transfer of risk, and therefore falls within the solvency framework of the securitizations, when it meets the conditions laid down in Articles 244.2 and 243.2 of the solvency regulation.

4.6.3. Investment or retained securitizations

The table below shows the amounts in terms of EAD of investment and retained securitization positions by type of exposure, tranches and weighting ranges corresponding to securitizations. In the case of originated securitizations, only those in which the Group fulfills the criteria for transfer of risk as of December 31, 2014 and 2013 are included.

TABLE 39: Amounts in terms of EAD of investment and retained securitization positions

																																						12/31/2014
						EAD broken down by ECAI (1)
						Standardized																Advanced
(millions of euros) Security Type		Exposure Type		Tranche		20%				40%;50%; 100%;225%; 350%;650%				1250%				Total Standardized				RW<15%				15%<RW<1250%				1250%				Total Advanced				Total
Investment		Balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			2058				0				0				2058				63				0				0				63				2121
				Intermediate			0				325				0				325				0				793				0				793				1117
				First-loss			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
		Off-balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				Intermediate			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				First-loss			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
TOTAL							2058				325				0				2383				63				793				0				856				3239
Retained		Balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			3				0				0				3				22				0				0				22				25
				Intermediate			0				45				0				45				0				0				0				0				45
				First-loss			0				0				135				135				0				0				145				145				280
		Off-balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				Intermediate			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				First-loss			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
TOTAL							3				45				135				183				22				0				145				167				351

(1) Those deducted from capital are excluded

																																						12/31/2013
						EAD broken down by ECAI tranches
						Standardized																Advanced
(millions of euros) Security Type		Exposure Type		Tranche		20%				40%;50%;100%;225%; 350%;650%				1250%				Total Standardized				RW<15%				15%<RW<1250%				1250%				Total Advanced				Total
Investment		Balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			4,291				0				0				4,291				11				0				0				11				4302
				Intermediate			0				116				0				116				0				761				0				761				878
				First-loss			0				0				6				6				0				0				10				10				16
		Off-balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				Intermediate			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				First-loss			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
TOTAL							4,291				116				6				4,413				11				761				10				782				5195
Retained		Balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			11				0				0				11				28				0				0				28				39
				Intermediate			0				89				0				89				0				25				0				25				113
				First-loss			0				0				197				197				0				0				75				75				272
		Off-balance-sheet exposure		Preferential			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				Intermediate			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
				First-loss			0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0				0
TOTAL							11				89				197				297				28				25				75				128				424

(1) Those deducted from capital are excluded

Page 103

Below are details of the RWAs by model, as well as the main variations during the period:

TABLE 40: Distribution of securitizations subject to risk weighting and deducted from capital

€ million
Securitization Risk
Category		Model		RWAs
1. Subject to risk weighting		Standardized			1,065
		Advanced			712
Subtotal 1					1,777
2. Deducted from capital		Standardized			1,738
		Advanced			237
Subtotal 2					1,975
TOTAL					3,752

TABLE 41: Variations in terms of RWAs of investment and retained securitizations

€ million
Securitization Risk
RWAs Dec 13			2,913
Effects
Activity			-448
Changes in RW			-620
Regulatory changes			0
Exchange rate			0
Other			-67
RWAs Dec 14			1,777

Variation in RWAs is due to:

• Activity: Amortization of securitizations, mainly United States investors.

• Changes in RW: Improvement in the asset quality associated with United States securitizations (€470 million approximately) and a general fall in the maximum ceiling for securitizations (originating), which now consume the limit fixed by the applicable regulation corresponding to the underlying assets, supposing an impact (mainly in Spain) of around €150 million.

4.6.4. Originated securitizations

4.6.4.1. Rating agencies used

The rating agencies that have been involved in the Group’s issues that fulfill the criteria of risk transfer and fall within the securitizations solvency framework are, generally, Fitch, Moody’s, S&P and DBRS.

In all the SSPEs, the agencies have assessed the risk of the entire issuance structure:

• Awarding ratings to all bond tranches.

• Establishing the volume of the credit enhancement.

Page 104

• Establishing the necessary triggers (early termination of the restitution period, pro-rata amortization of AAA classes, pro-rata amortization of series subordinated to AAA and amortization of the reserve fund, among others).

In each and every one of the issues, in addition to the initial rating, the agencies carry out regular quarterly monitoring.

4.6.4.2. Breakdown of securitized balances by type of asset

The next tables give the current outstanding balance, non-performing exposures and impairment losses recognized in the period corresponding to the underlying assets of originated securitizations, in which risk transfer criteria are fulfilled, broken down by type of asset, as of December 31, 2014 and 2013.

TABLE 42: Breakdown of securitized balances by type of asset

										12/31/2014
Million euros Type of asset		Current balance				Of which: Non-Performing Exposures (1)				Total impairment losses for the period
Commercial and residential mortgages			155				24				1
Credit cards			0				0				0
Financial leasing			206				26				1
Lending to corporates			296				46				7
Consumer finance			142				11				22
Receivables			0				0				0
Securitization balances			0				0				0
Other			0				0				0
TOTAL			798				108				32

Notes

(1) It includes the total amount of exposures impaired for reasons of default or for other reasons.

										12/31/2013
(millions of euros) Type of asset		Current balance				Of which: Non-Performing Exposures (1)				Total impairment losses for the period
Commercial and residential mortgages			182				15				61
Credit cards			0				0				0
Financial leasing			286				30				5
Lending to corporates			435				54				7
Consumer finance			309				25				20
Receivables			0				0				0
Securitization balances			0				0				0
Other			0				0				0
TOTAL			1,212				124				93

Notes

(1) It includes the total amount of exposures impaired for reasons of default or for other reasons.

In 2014 and 2013, there were no securitizations that fulfill the transfer criteria according to the requirements of the solvency regulation, and, therefore, no results were recognized.

BBVA has been the structurer of all transactions effected since 2006 (excluding the Unnim transactions).

Page 105

The table below shows the outstanding balance of underlying assets of securitizations originated by the Group, in which risk transfer criteria are not fulfilled. These, therefore, are not included in the solvency framework for securitizations; the capital exposed is calculated as if they had not been securitized:

TABLE 43: Outstanding balance corresponding to the underlying assets of the Group’s originated securitizations, in which risk transfer criteria are not fulfilled

(millions of euros) Type of asset		Current balance
		2014				2013
Commercial and residential mortgages			22,916				19,404
Credit cards			0				0
Financial leasing			14				25
Lending to corporates			2,525				3,760
Consumer finance			1,071				1,209
Receivables			0				0
Securitization balances			58				0
Mortgage-covered bonds			0				0
Other			0				75
TOTAL			26,584				24,474

4.7. Information on credit risk mitigation techniques

4.7.1. Hedging based on netting operations on and off the balance sheet

Within the limits established by the rules on netting in each one of its operating countries, the Group negotiates with its customers the assignment of the derivatives business to master agreements (e.g., ISDA or CMOF) that include the netting of off-balance sheet transactions.

The text of each agreement in each case determines the transactions subject to netting.

The mitigation of counterparty risk exposure stemming from the use of mitigation techniques (netting plus the use of collateral agreements) leads to a reduction in overall exposure (current market value plus potential risk).

As pointed out above, financial assets and liabilities may be the object of netting, in other words presentation for a net amount on the balance sheet, only when the Group’s entities comply with the provisions of IAS 32—Paragraph 42, and thus have the legal right to offset the amounts recognized, and the intention to settle the net amount or to divest the asset and pay the liability at the same time.

4.7.2. Hedging based on collaterals

4.7.2.1. Management and valuation policies and procedures

The procedures for management and valuation of collateral are included in the Policies and Procedures for Retail and Wholesale Credit Risk.

These Policies and Procedures lay down the basic principles of credit risk management, which includes the management of the collateral assigned in transactions with customers.

Accordingly, the risk management model jointly values the existence of a suitable cash flow generation by the obligor that enables them to service the debt, together with the existence of suitable and sufficient collaterals that ensure the recovery of the credit when the obligor’s circumstances render them unable to meet their obligations.

Page 106

The valuation of the collateral is governed by prudential principles that involve the use of appraisal for real-estate collaterals, market price for shares, quoted value of shares in a mutual fund, etc.

The milestones under which the valuations of the collaterals must be updated in accordance with local regulation are established under these prudential principles.

With respect to the entities that carry out the valuation of the collateral, principles are in place in accordance with local regulations that govern their level of relationship and dependence with the Group and their recognition by the local regulator. These valuations will be updated by statistical methods, indices or appraisals of goods, which shall be carried out under the generally accepted standards in each market and in accordance with local regulations.

All collateral assigned is to be properly instrumented and recorded in the corresponding register, and approved by the Group’s legal units.

4.7.2.2. Types of collaterals

As collateral for the purpose of calculating equity, the Group uses the coverage established in the solvency regulations. The following are the main collaterals available in the Group:

• Mortgage collateral: The collateral is the property upon which the loan is arranged.

• Financial collateral: Their object is any one of the following financial assets, as per articles 197 and 198 of the solvency regulations.

• Cash deposits, deposit certificates or similar securities.

• Debt securities issued for the different categories.

• Shares or convertible bonds.

• Other property and rights used as collateral: The following property and rights are considered acceptable as collateral as per article 200 of the solvency regulations.

• Cash deposits, deposit certificates or similar instruments held in third-party institutions other than the lending credit institution, when these are pledged in favor of the latter.

• Life insurance policies pledged in favor of the lending credit institution.

• Debt securities issued by other institutions, provided that these securities are to be repurchased at a pre-set price by the issuing institutions at the request of the holder of the securities.

The value of the exposure covered with financial collateral and other collateral calculated using the standardized approach is as follows:

Page 107

TABLE 44: Exposure covered with financial collateral and other collateral calculated using the standardized approach

		STANDARDIZED APPROACH								ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH
2014 (millions of euros) Categories of Exposure		Exposure covered by financial collateral				Exposure covered by other eligible collateral				Exposure covered by financial collateral				Exposure covered by other eligible collateral
Central governments or central banks			3,000				0				1				7
Regional governments or local authorities			14				0				0				0
Public sector entities			362				38				0				0
Multilateral Development Banks			0				0				0				0
International organizations			0				0				0				0
Institutions			391				2				59,901				1,670
Corporates			3,219				145				38,878				4,549
Retail			1,276				59				0				0
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			129				306				0				0
Exposures in default			98				15				0				0
Items associated with particularly high risk			2				0				0				0
Covered bonds			0				0				0				0
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			229				0				0				0
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			74				0				0				0
Other exposures			3				0				0				0
TOTAL EXPOSURE VALUE AFTER GUARANTEES			8,796				564				98,781				6,225
		STANDARDIZED APPROACH								ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH
2013 (millions of euros) Categories of Exposure		Exposure covered by financial collateral				Exposure covered by other eligible collateral				Exposure covered by financial collateral				Exposure covered by other eligible collateral
Central governments or central banks			8,443				0				7				0
Regional governments or local authorities			25				19				0				0
Public sector entities			170				0				0				0
Multilateral Development Banks			0				0				0				0
International organizations			0				0				0				0
Institutions			716				30				36,657				1,348
Corporates			1,823				358				9,724				57,810
Retail			1,345				96				0				0
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			58				305				0				0
Exposures in default			34				15				0				0
Items associated with particularly high risk			5				0				0				0
Covered bonds			0				0				0				0
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			0				0				0				0
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			554				0				0				0
Other exposures			10				0				0				0
TOTAL EXPOSURE VALUE AFTER GUARANTEES			13,183				824				46,387				59,158

4.7.3. Hedging based on personal collaterals

According to the solvency regulations, signature collaterals are personal collaterals, including those arising from credit insurance, that have been granted by the providers of coverage defined in articles 201 and 202 of the solvency regulations.

For the purpose of hedge accounting, on December 31, 2014 the Group had a residual amount of €20 million in credit derivatives used for the lending portfolio.

In the category of Retail exposure under the advanced measurement approach, collaterals impact on the PD and do not reduce the amount of the credit risk in EAD.

The total value of the exposure covered with personal collaterals is as follows:

Page 108

TABLE 45: Exposure covered by personal collaterals. Standardized and advanced approach

(millions of euros)		Exposure covered by personal guarantees
Categories of Exposure		2014				2013
Central governments or central banks			0				0
Regional governments or local authorities			86				2,329
Public sector entities			2,661				123
Multilateral Development Banks			0				0
International organizations			0				0
Institutions			1				0
Corporates			2,238				3,456
Retail			996				1,541
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			1,229				974
Exposures in default			514				1,896
Items associated with particularly high risk			139				182
Covered bonds			0				0
Institutions and corporates with credit quality, short-term			0				0
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			0				0
Other exposures			1,230				303
TOTAL EXPOSURE VALUE AFTER COLLATERAL UNDER STANDARDIZED APPROACH			9,094				10,804
Central governments or central banks			649				581
Institutions			847				1,026
Corporates			5,948				6,184
TOTAL EXPOSURE VALUE AFTER COLLATERAL UNDER ADVANCED APPROACH			7,444				7,791
TOTAL			16,538				18,595

4.7.4. Risk concentration

BBVA has established the measurement, monitoring and reporting criteria for the analysis of large credit exposures that could represent a risk of concentration, with the aim of collateraling their alignment with the risk appetite defined in the Group.

In particular, measurement and monitoring criteria are established for large exposures at the level of individual concentrations, concentrations of retail portfolios and wholesale sectors, and geographical concentrations.

A quarterly measurement and monitoring process has been established for reviewing the risks of concentration.

4.8. RWA density by geographical area

A summary of the average weighting percentages by exposure category existing in the main geographical areas in which the Group operates is shown below, for the purpose of obtaining an overview of the entity’s risk profile in terms of RWAs.

Page 109

TABLE 46: Breakdown of RWA density by geographical area and approach

2014		RWA density
(millions of euros) Category of exposure		TOTAL				Spain				Eurasia				Mexico				U.S.				South America				Rest of the World
Central governments or central banks			28	%			0	%			10	%			0	%			1	%			101	%			0	%
Deferred tax assets			100	%			100	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%
Regional governments or local authorities			45	%			21	%			23	%			24	%			60	%			46	%			0	%
Public sector entities			53	%			15	%			94	%			48	%			5	%			82	%			0	%
Multilateral Development Banks			30	%			20	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			66	%			0	%
International organizations			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%
Institutions			23	%			0	%			22	%			20	%			18	%			29	%			21	%
Corporates			93	%			94	%			99	%			70	%			91	%			99	%			100	%
Retail			71	%			67	%			69	%			75	%			68	%			72	%			75	%
Secured by mortgages on immovable property			38	%			37	%			40	%			36	%			37	%			41	%			36	%
Exposures in default			104	%			107	%			101	%			100	%			101	%			100	%			100	%
Items associated with particularly high risk			90	%			90	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%			0	%
Covered bonds			20	%			0	%			0	%			20	%			0	%			0	%			0	%
Short-term claims on institutions and corporate			23	%			22	%			0	%			0	%			21	%			31	%			0	%
Collective investments undertakings (CIU)			28	%			20	%			20	%			0	%			20	%			100	%			0	%
Other exposures			55	%			93	%			13	%			43	%			32	%			30	%			0	%
Securitized positions			41	%			291	%			0	%			58	%			26	%			0	%			0	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE STANDARDIZED APPROACH			53	%			40	%			45	%			32	%			62	%			76	%			57	%
Central governments or central banks			8	%			33	%			3	%			12	%			1	%			11	%			16	%
Institutions			11	%			15	%			7	%			3	%			17	%			24	%			14	%
Corporates			59	%			59	%			56	%			74	%			39	%			50	%			66	%
Retail			24	%			18	%			8	%			97	%			6	%			11	%			7	%
Equity Exposures			204	%			180	%			217	%			236	%			272	%			248	%			308	%
Securitized positions			70	%			71	%			0	%			0	%			5	%			0	%			104	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK BY THE ADVANCED MEASUREMENT APPROACH			37	%			33	%			32	%			87	%			29	%			67	%			53	%
TOTAL CREDIT RISK DILUTION AND DELIVERY			45	%			35	%			36	%			50	%			58	%			76	%			53	%

Note: Positions in equity are not included.

As shown, the Group has a RWA density below 50%, with the lowest densities concentrated in the euro zone countries (in line with the rest of Spanish peers) and the highest in the Americas. The reason for this lies in:

• The weight that the advanced measurement approaches represent in Spain with respect to the rest of the countries in which the Group operates, as explained in section 4.2.3.

• The RWs applied to European PAs represent a small percentage with respect to the RWs applied to the PAs outside the euro zone.

• Moreover, the exposures in Europe with institutional counterparties (which have a low associated RW) represent a higher percentage of the portfolio’s total than in the rest of the Group’s countries.

Page 110

5. Market risk in trading book activities

Differences in the trading book for the purposes of applying the solvency regulations and the Accounting Circular

Internal models

• Scope of application

• Features of the models used

• Stress testing

• Backtesting

5.1. Differences in the trading book for the purposes of applying the solvency regulations and the Accounting Circular

According to the solvency regulations, the trading book shall be made up of all the positions in financial instruments and commodities that the credit institution holds for the purpose of trading or that act as hedging for other elements in this book.

With respect to this book, the rule also refers to the need to establish clearly defined policies and procedures.

For this purpose, regulatory trading book activities defined by the BBVA Group include the positions managed by the Group’s Trading units, for which market risk limits are set and then monitored daily. Moreover, they comply with the other requirements defined in the solvency regulations.

The trading book as an accounting concept is not confined to any business area, but rather follows the true reflection criteria laid down in the accounting regulations. Included in this category are all the financial assets and liabilities originated, acquired or issued with the aim of short-term redemption or repurchase, whether they are part of a jointly-managed portfolio of instruments for which there is evidence of recent action to obtain short-term gains, or derivative instruments that do not comply with the definition of a collateral contract and have not been designated as hedge accounting instruments. Hence, for example, all derivatives are booked as accounting trading book unless they are hedging derivatives, regardless of whether or not they are part of the Trading units’ exposure or they come from other business areas.

5.2. Standardized approach

The positions subject to the application of the standardized approach in the calculation of the capital requirements for market risk have a limited weight on the total exposure in the Group’s trading books (around 17%).

The amount of required capital amounts to €234 million, as described in section 3.1 of this document.

With respect to 2013, there is an increase of €10 million in the requirements, due mainly to the increase in the book position.

Page 111

5.3. Internal models

5.3.1 Scope of application

For the purposes of calculating capital as approved by the Bank of Spain, the scope of application of the internal market risk model extends to BBVA S.A. and BBVA Bancomer Trading Floors.

Below are the items on the consolidated balance sheet (for accounting purposes) of the above entities subject to market risk, indicating the part whose measurement falls within the internal VaR models:

TABLE 47: Trading Book. Items on the balance sheet subject to market risk under internal model

		Million euros
		Main market risk metrics
2014 Items on the Group’s consolidated balance sheet subject to market risk		VaR				Other*
Assets subject to market risk
Trading book			74,744				825
Available-for-sale financial assets			99				62.007
Of which: Equity instruments			—				6,373
Hedging derivatives			404				1.890
Liabilities subject to market risk
Trading book			50,457				2,675
Hedging derivatives			1,085				979

(*) Mainly includes the assets and liabilities whose measurement is part of the structural risk management framework (ALCO).

The trading book subject to the internal model (BBVA S.A. and Bancomer) represents a gross amount of 116,000 million, accounting for 83% of the Group’s total trading book.

5.3.2 Features of the models used

The measurement procedures are established in terms of the possible impact of negative market conditions, both under ordinary circumstances and in situations of tension, on the trading book of the Group’s Global Markets units.

The standard metric for measuring market risk is Value at Risk (VaR), which indicates the maximum losses that may be incurred in the portfolios at a given confidence level (99%) and time horizon (one day).

This statistic is widely used in the market and has the advantage of summarizing in a single metric the risks inherent in trading activity, taking into account the relations between all of them, and providing the forecast of the losses that the trading book might incur as a result of price variations in equity markets, interest rates, exchange rates and commodities. In addition, for certain positions, other risks also need to be considered, such as credit spread risk, basis risk, volatility and correlation risk.

Page 112

With respect to the risk measurement models used in BBVA Group, the Bank of Spain has authorized the use of the internal model for the calculation of capital for the risk positions in the trading book of BBVA, S.A. and BBVA Bancomer which, together, contribute more than 80% of the market risk of the Group’s trading book.

The model used estimates the VaR in accordance with the “historical simulation” methodology, which involves estimating the losses and gains that would have been incurred in the current portfolio if the changing market conditions that occurred over a given period of time were repeated. Based on this information, it infers the maximum foreseeable loss in the current portfolio with a given level of confidence. The model has the advantage of accurately reflecting the historical distribution of the market variables and of not requiring any specific distribution assumption. The historical period used in this model is two years.

VaR figures are estimated following two methodologies:

• VaR without smoothing, which awards equal weight to the daily information for the previous two years. This is currently the official methodology for measuring market risks vis-à-vis limits compliance.

• VaR with smoothing, which weighs more recent market information more heavily. This metric is supplementary to the one above.

VaR with smoothing adapts itself more swiftly to the changes in financial market conditions, whereas VaR without smoothing is, in general, a more stable metric that will tend to exceed VaR with smoothing when the markets show less volatile trends, but be lower when they present upturns in uncertainty.

Furthermore, and following the guidelines established by Spanish and European regulators, BBVA incorporates additional VaR metrics to fulfill the regulatory requirements issued by the Bank of Spain for the purpose of calculating capital for the trading book. Specifically, the new measures incorporated in the Group since December 2011 (which follow the guidelines set out by Basel 2.5) are as follows:

• VaR: In regulatory terms, the charge for VaR Stress is added to the charge for VaR and the sum of both (VaR and VaR Stress) is calculated. This quantifies the loss associated with movements in the risk factors inherent in market operations (interest rate, FX, RV, credit, etc.). Both VaR and VaR Stress are rescaled by a regulatory multiplier set at three and by the square root of ten to calculate the capital charge.

• Specific Risk: IRC. Quantification of non-performing risk and downgrade risk in the rating of some positions held in the portfolio, such as bonds and credit derivatives. The specific risk capital for IRC is a charge used exclusively for geographical areas with an approved internal model (BBVA S.A. and Bancomer). The capital charge is determined based on the associated losses (at 99.9% over a time horizon of 1 year under the assumption of constant risk) resulting from the rating migration and/or default status of the asset’s issuer. Also included is the price risk in sovereign positions for the indicated items.

Page 113

• Specific Risk: Securitizations and Correlation Portfolios. Capital charge for the securitizations and the correlation portfolio for potential losses associated with the rating level of a given credit structure (rating). Both are calculated using the standardized approach. The perimeter of the correlation portfolios is referred to FTD-type market operations and/or market CDO tranches, and only for positions with an active market and hedging capacity.

Validity tests are performed periodically on the risk measurement models used by the Group. They estimate the maximum loss that could have been incurred in the positions assessed with a given level of probability (backtesting), as well as measurements of the impact of extreme market events on the risk positions held (stress testing). Backtesting is performed at the trading desk level as an additional control measure in order to carry out a more specific monitoring of the validity of the measurement models.

The current market risk management structure includes the monitoring of limits. This monitoring consists of a system of limits based on VaR (Value at Risk) and economic capital (based on VaR measurements) and VaR sub-limits, as well as stop-loss limits for each of the Group’s business units. The global limits are proposed by the market risk unit and approved by the Executive Committee on an annual basis, once they have been submitted to the GRMC and the Risk Committee. This limits structure is developed by identifying specific risks by type, trading activity and trading desk. Moreover, the market risk unit maintains consistency between the limits. The control structure in place is supplemented by limits on loss and a system of alert signals to anticipate the effects of adverse situations in terms of risk and/or result.

5.3.2.1 Market risk in 2014

The average VaR for 2014 stood at €23 million, as in 2013, with a maximum level in the year reached on October 16, which amounted to €28 million and was due to the uncertainty about the recovery of the Greek economy.

The following tables show VaR without smoothing by risk factor for the Group:

CHART 19: Trading Book. Trends in VaR without smoothing

Page 114

TABLE 48: Trading Book. VaR without smoothing by risk factors

(millions of euros) VaR by risk factors		Interest-rate and spread risk				Exchange-rate risk				Equity risk				Vega/correlation risk				Diversification effect (*)				Total
2,014
Average VaR for the period																							23
Maximum VaR for the period			31				6				4				10				(22	)			28
Minimum VaR for the period			24				4				3				11				(23	)			20
VaR at end of period			30				5				2				7				(20	)			25
2,013
Average VaR for the period																							23
Maximum VaR for the period			39				4				2				13				(24	)			34
Minimum VaR for the period			19				3				2				11				(18	)			17
VaR at end of period			22				4				3				11				(18	)			22

By type of market risk assumed by the Group’s trading book, the main risk factor in the Group continues to be the one linked to interest rates, with a weight of 67% of the total at the end of 2014 (this figure includes the spread risk), with the relative weight increasing compared to the close of 2013 (55%). The exchange-rate risk accounts for 12%, increasing on the figure for the same date the previous year (10%), while the equity and volatility and correlation risks are down, with a weight of 5% and 16, respectively, at the close of 2014 (8% and 27% at the close of 2013).

In accordance with article 455 e) of the solvency regulations –corresponding to the breakdown of information on internal market risk models–, the elements comprising the capital requirements referred to in articles 364 and 365 of those regulations are presented below.

TABLE 49: Trading Book. Market risk. Regulatory capital

				12/31/2014
Type of Risk € mill - 2014		Item		REGULATORY CAPITAL
				GM Europe, NY and Asia				GM Bancomer
Market Risk BIS II		VaR / CeR			102				83
Market Risk BIS II.5		VaR Stress			140				209
		IRC			95				82
		of which securitizations			23				7
		of which correlation			70				0
Total Market Risk					337				375

				12/31/2013
Type of Risk € mill - 2013		Item		REGULATORY CAPITAL
				GM Europe, NY and Asia				GM Bancomer
Market Risk BIS II		VaR / CeR			84				79
Market Risk BIS II.5		VaR Stress			106				154
		IRC			97				95
		Securitizations			5				2
		Correlation			12				0
Total Market Risk					287				328

The change is due mainly to the increase in exposure in internal models, specifically an increase in positioning in the bond portfolio and a slight increase in credit spreads.

Page 115

5.3.2.2 Stress testing

All the tasks associated with stress, methodologies, scenarios of market variables or reports are undertaken in coordination with the Group’s Risk Areas.

Different stress test exercises are performed on the BBVA Group’s trading portfolios. Both local and global historical scenarios are used, which replicate the behavior of a past extreme event, for example, the collapse of Lehman Brothers or the Tequila crisis. These stress exercises are supplemented with simulated scenarios which aim to generate scenarios that have a significant impact on the different portfolios, but without being restricted to a specific historical scenario.

Lastly, for certain portfolios or positions, fixed stress test exercises are also prepared that have a significant impact on the market variables that affect those positions.

Historical scenarios

The base historical stress scenario in BBVA Group is that of Lehman Brothers, whose sudden collapse in September 2008 had a significant impact on the behavior of financial markets at a global level. The most relevant effects of this historical scenario include:

1) Credit shock: reflected mainly in the increase in credit spreads and downgrades of credit ratings.

2) Increased volatility in most financial markets (giving rise to much variation in the prices of the different assets (currencies, equity, debt)).

3) Liquidity shock in the financial systems, reflected in major fluctuations in interbank curves, particularly in the shortest sections of the euro and dollar curves.

TABLE 50: Trading Book. Impact on earnings in Lehman scenario

		Impact on earnings in Lehman scenario
Million euros		12/31/2014				12/31/2013
GM Europe			-29				-23
GM Bancomer			-50				-67
GM Argentina			-2				-5
GM Chile			-5				-6
GM Colombia			-2				-2
GM Peru			-13				-7
GM Venezuela			-3				-3

Page 116

Simulated scenarios

Unlike the historical scenarios, which are fixed and, thus, do not adapt to the composition of portfolio risks at any given time, the scenario used to perform the economic stress exercises is based on the resampling method. This methodology is based on the use of dynamic scenarios that are recalculated on a regular basis according to what the main risks in the trading portfolios are. A simulation exercise is carried out in a data window wide enough to include different stress periods (data is taken from 1-1-2008 until today) by the re-sampling of historical observations. This generates a distribution of gains and losses that allows an analysis of the most extreme events in the selected historical window. The advantage of this methodology is that the stress period is not pre-established, but rather a function of the portfolio held at any given time; and the large number of simulations (10,000) means that the expected shortfall analysis can include richer information than that available in scenarios included in the VaR calculation.

The main features of this methodology are as follows:

a) The simulations generated follow the data correlation structure

b) It provides flexibility in terms of including new risk factors

c) It enables a great deal of variability to be introduced (which is desirable for considering extreme events)

The impact of the stress tests by simulated scenarios (Stress VaR 95% at 20 days, Expected Shortfall 95% at 20 days and Stress VaR 99% at 1 day - 30/06/2014) is shown below.

TABLE 51: Trading Book. Stress resampling

mill €		EUROPA				BANCOMER				PERU				VENEZUELA				ARGENTINA				COLOMBIA				CHILE
Expected Shortfall			-56				-35				-30				-9				-2				-3				-9

		Stress VaR				Expected Shortfall				Stress Period				Stress VaR 1D
		95 20D				95 20 D								99% Resampling
TOTAL			-73.1				-96.1				02/01/2008 - 07/10/2010				-35.0
GM Europe, NY and Asia			-34.1				-43.6				02/01/2008 - 02/12/2009				-17.8
GM Bancomer			-39.0				-52.5				09/10/2008 - 07/10/2010				-17.2

5.3.2.3 Backtesting

The Group’s market risk measurement model needs to have a backtesting or self-validation program that assures that the risk measurements being made are appropriate.

The internal market risk model is validated on a regular basis by backtesting in both BBVA S.A. and Bancomer.

The purpose of backtesting is to validate the quality and accuracy of the internal model used by BBVA Group to estimate the maximum daily loss for a portfolio, for a 99% confidence level and a time horizon of 250 days, by comparing the Group’s results and the risk measures generated by the model.

Page 117

These tests confirmed that the internal market risk model used by BBVA S.A. and Bancomer is adequate and accurate.

Two types of backtesting were performed in 2014:

1. “Hypothetical” backtesting: the daily VaR is compared with the results obtained without taking into account the intraday results or the changes in the portfolio’s positions. This validates that the market risk metric is appropriate for the end-of-day position.

2. “Real” backtesting: the daily VaR is compared with the total results, including intraday operations, but deducting any possible allowances or commissions generated. This type of backtesting incorporates the intraday risk in the portfolios.

In addition, each of these two types of backtesting was performed at risk factor or business type level, thus providing a more in-depth comparison of results versus risk measures.

CHART 20: Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA S.A. Hypothetical backtesting

Page 118

CHART 21: Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA S.A. Real backtesting

BBVA Bancomer:

CHART 22: Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA Bancomer. Hypothetical backtesting

Page 119

CHART 23: Trading Book. Validation of the Market Risk Measurement model for BBVA Bancomer. Real backtesting

The atypical value shown in the chart corresponds to June 5, coinciding with Banxico’s decision to reduce the reference interest rate by 50 basis points, with impacts seen in the domestic governmental and interbank curves, which fell on average by 37 and 38 basis points, both within 1 month.

5.3.3 Characteristics of the risk management system

The Group has a risk management system in place which is appropriate for the volume of risks managed, complying with the functions set out in the Corporate Policies on Market Risks in Market Activities.

The risk units must have:

• A suitable organization (means, resources and experience) in line with the nature and complexity of the business.

• Segregation of functions and independence in decision-making.

• Performance under integrity and good governance principles, driving the best practices in the industry and complying with the rules, both internal (policies, procedures) and external (regulation, supervision, guidelines).

• The existence of channels for communication with the relevant corporate bodies at local level according to their corporate governance system, as well as with the Corporate Area.

• All market risks existing in the business units that carry out their activity in markets must be adequately identified, measured and assessed, and procedures must be in place for their control and mitigation.

• The Global Market Risk Unit (GMRU), as the unit responsible for managing market risk at Group level, must promote the use of objective and uniform metrics for measuring the different types of risks.

The Group uses internal audit and validation procedures for the risk measurement model that are independent of the model development process.

Page 120

6. Operational risk

Operational Risk definition

Operational Risk methodology

Model based on three lines of defense

Principles of BBVA’s Operational Risk management model

Methods employed

Description of the advanced measurement approaches

The Group’s Operational Risk profile

Governance of the Operational Risk model

6.1. Operational Risk definition

BBVA accepts the definition of Operational Risk proposed by the Bank for International Settlements (BIS) in Basel: “Operational Risk is defined as the one that could potentially cause losses as a result of human errors, inadequate or faulty internal processes, system failures or external events”. This definition excludes the strategic and/or business risk and the reputational risk (which is managed separately within BBVA Group).

The definition of Operational Risk (OR) in BBVA Group includes the following types of risk:

• Processes.

• External and internal fraud.

• Technological.

• Human resources.

• Commercial practices.

• Disasters.

• Suppliers.

6.2. Operational Risk methodology

The Group has in place an integrated internal control and operational risk methodology.

This methodology identifies risks in organizational areas, generates analyses that prioritize risks according to the estimated residual risk (after incorporating control effects), links risks to processes and establishes an objective risk level for each risk type to identify and manage gaps by comparing it with the residual risk level. The Group has developed a corporate application to provide the required support for this methodology: STORM (Support Tool for Operational Risk Management), which includes modules of indicators and scenarios.

Page 121

The Corporate Risk Area, through its Corporate Operational Risk Management (CORM) unit, will establish the criteria to apply for determining the BBVA Group companies in which the OR monitoring and management/mitigation tools described in section 3.3 should be implemented. These criteria will be based on both quantitative and qualitative aspects.

The scope of application of the OR management model revolves around the following elements:

• Company

• Process: in general, OR originates in the different activities/processes carried out in the Group.

• Business line: because the type of the different operational risks to which the Group is exposed, and their impact, is substantially different for each line of business, considering this element is fundamental for effective management of OR. Each line has a characteristic risk profile: for example, the risk profile of retail banking is different in terms of type, impact and frequency than that of corporate banking, or the market activity.

6.3. Model based on 3 lines of defense

BBVA Group’s OR management model comprises 3 lines of defense:

1. First line: management in business and support areas (hereinafter the Areas) of the OR in their products, activities, processes and systems.

The Areas must integrate OR management into their day-to-day activities, collaborating in the identification and assessment of risks, establishing the target risk, carrying out the controls and executing the mitigation plans for those risks whose residual risk level is higher than the acceptable one.

In all OR management areas, the Operational Risk Managers (Business ORMs) ensure adequate management of operational risk in their respective areas, promoting the identification of the target risk and ensuring the implementation of the mitigation plans and proper execution of controls. OR management in the units is set out, expressed and followed at the Operational Risk Management Committee (ORM Committee).

2. Second line: the “Corporate Operational Risk Management” (CORM) and “Operational Risk Management” functions at country level, which are independent of the first line, are in charge of designing and maintaining the Group’s OR model and verifying its proper application in the different Areas.

Moreover, the activities of this second line of defense include those carried out by the Specialized Control Units: Legal Compliance, Internal Risk Control³, Internal Financial Control, Operational Control, IT Risk, Fraud & Security, as well as those of the Production Managers for Procurement, Real Estate and Services, HR and Strategy and Finance in Spain. The activities carried out by this second line of defense are:

• Identify the main risks in their field of expertise for the Areas, as well as their assessment.

• Define mitigating measures and ensure their implementation by the Areas.

• Assist the Areas in fulfilling their responsibility.

³  Units included in the Risk network

Page 122

The Holding Specialists provide a cross-cutting vision to the Group’s model, establishing risk references and controls for their Local Specialists to collateral an independent, expert and consistent vision.

3. Third line: carried out by BBVA’s Internal Audit, which:

• Conducts an independent review of the model, verifying compliance with the corporate policies established and their effectiveness

• Provides independent information on the control environment to the Corporate Assurance Committees

CHART 24: Operational risk management framework: Three lines of defense

6.4. Principles of BBVA’s Operational Risk management model

Operational Risk management in BBVA Group must:

• Be aligned with the Risk Appetite statement set out by the Board of Directors of BBVA.

• Predict the potential operational risks to which the Group may be exposed as a result of the emergence or modification of new products, activities, processes or systems and outsourcing decisions and establish procedures to enable their assessment and reasonable mitigation prior to their implementation.

• Establish methodologies and procedures to enable a regular reassessment of the relevant operational risks to which the Group is exposed, in order to adopt appropriate mitigation measures in each case, after considering the identified risk and the cost of mitigation (cost-benefit analysis) and preserving at all times the Group’s solvency.

• Identify the causes of the operational losses sustained by the Group and establish measures to enable their reduction. To do so, procedures must be in place to enable the capture and analysis of the operational events causing such losses.

• Analyze the events that may have caused operational risk losses in other entities in the financial sector and drive, where appropriate, the implementation of the measures necessary to prevent their occurrence in the Group.

Page 123

• Identify, analyze and quantify events with a low probability of occurrence and high impact which, due to their exceptional nature, may possibly not be included in the losses database or, if they are, have unrepresentative impacts, in order to ensure their mitigation.

• Have effective governance in which the functions and responsibilities of the Areas and Bodies involved in OR management are clearly defined.

TABLE 52: Characteristics of the Operational Risk management model

Soundness		Board Holding - Country - Unit
Depth		Model created in 1999 using database since 2002
Integrated management		Capital, budgets, incentives, internal benchmark, culture
Forward-looking		Uses future variables for analysis, calculation and mitigation
Continuous improvement		Best practices function and continuous updating

These principles reflect BBVA Group’s vision of OR, which is based on the premise that the events that occur as a result of OR have an ultimate cause that should always be identified. The control of the causes significantly reduces the impact of the events. The OR management tools must provide information on the origin of OR and assist in its mitigation.

Irrespective of the adoption of all possible measures and controls to prevent or reduce both the frequency and severity of OR events, BBVA must ensure that it has sufficient capital at all times to cover the expected or unexpected losses that may arise.

In this regard, BBVA Group is committed to preferably applying the advanced measurement approaches for calculating capital use for OR defined by the BIS, unless the risk profile of a specific unit does not justify the assumption of the costs that their implementation entails. Those areas that do not use the advanced measurement approaches must be one level below the advanced approach (standardized approach or equivalent).

Corporate Operational Risk Management (CORM) proposes the general policies that guide management and enable control of the Group’s operational risk.

Based on these principles, BBVA Group has drawn up this operational risk management policy, which aims to reasonably ensure (cost-benefit analysis) that the relevant operational risks to which the Group is exposed in carrying out its activities are identified, assessed and managed consistently with the risk appetite statement set out by the Board of Directors of BBVA, preserving the Group’s solvency.

To achieve this objective, OR must be managed in BBVA Group from two different and complementary viewpoints:

• The “ex-ante” point of view, which involves identifying, assessing and prioritizing potential operational risks to enable their mitigation.

From this standpoint, OR is managed in a proactive and preventive way by the Areas and Units exposed. This management is integrated into the day-to-day decision-making process (use test) and is focused on the analysis of the causes of OR to enable its mitigation.

Page 124

• The “ex-post” point of view, which involves assessing the exposure to OR and measuring its consequences, i.e. the historical cost of the events that have occurred. From this perspective, OR management uses tools associated with the consequences of OR not only to complement OR management, but also to feed the calculation of capital use for OR for those Group areas that operate under advanced OR measurement approaches.

The elements that enable OR to be managed in BBVA Group from these two standpoints are described below.

6.4.1 Operational Risk management parameters

In order to align operational risk management with the risk appetite statement set out by the Board of Directors, it is necessary to define the Operational Risk management parameters and/or the different types of operational risks faced by the Group in its activities.

These management parameters must incorporate both quantitative and qualitative indicators that enable the Group’s operational risk profile to be assessed on a regular basis and act as levers for managing this risk.

CORM is the area responsible for defining these management parameters and reporting periodically on their level of compliance.

6.4.2.Operational Risk admission process

Although strictly speaking there is not a true OR admission process, as the one carried out, for example, in Credit Risk, BBVA Group considers that the assimilation presented in this section is useful for controlling this risk and contributes to its mitigation. The aim of this process is to: anticipate the potential operational risks to which the Group may be exposed as a result of the emergence or modification of new products, activities, processes or systems and outsourcing decisions and ensure that they are implemented only after adopting suitable mitigation measures in each case.

The Group will have a specific governance model for OR admission that will take the form of different Committees that will act as admission vehicles in the different areas in which the emergence of OR is concentrated: new businesses, new products, systems, outsourcing decisions, etc.

Effective and flexible procedures will exist in each of the above areas to enable the carrying out of activities based on best practices. These procedures will have a process vision that makes a distinction between strategic decisions and technical decisions, and will have a simple form of governance with adequate representation.

Effectiveness in the admission procedure will require a full assessment of OR and monitoring of incidents, constraints, events, operational losses, objections, etc. that may appear after the admission.

The responsibility for preparing the corporate procedures related to the approval of operational risks assumed as a result of:

• New products, activities and processes lies with CORM

• Outsourcing decisions lies with Operational Control⁴ (I&T Technology)

• New systems lies with IT Risk, Fraud & Security (I&T Technology)

⁴  Units included in the Risk network

Page 125

6.4.3. Operational Risk monitoring and management/mitigation tools

6.4.3.1. Risk and Control Self-Assessment

An appropriate management of OR requires the establishment of methodologies and procedures to identify, assess and follow this type of risks, in order to implement suitable mitigation measures in each case. This will be done by comparing the level of risk assumed and the cost of mitigation.

BBVA Group’s OR management methodology has the following phases:

• Establishment of the model’s perimeter, identifying the companies and activities that may give rise to significant OR. These companies and activities are associated with their processes using the taxonomy established by the Group. Processes are the starting point for identifying the OR factors.

• Identification of potential and real OR factors based on the review of the processes, applying self-assessment techniques that are completed and verified against other relevant information.

• Prioritization of the OR factors through the calculation of the inherent risk: estimation of the exposure to risk in an adverse and conservative environment without considering the existence of possible controls. Prioritization is used to separate the critical factors from the non-critical ones by applying cut-off points.

• For critical risks, the controls that contribute to their reduction are identified, documented and tested, and based on their effectiveness the residual risk (which incorporates the reducing effect of the controls, where applicable) is calculated.

• A specific target is set for each critical risk, that constitutes the level of risk considered acceptable. In those risks in which the residual risk is higher than the target risk there is a gap between both that requires that the risk be mitigated through a mitigation plan.

The aim is to have an evolving and dynamic OR management model that reflects the essential aspects of this risk’s situation at any given time.

OR management should be coordinated with other risks, considering the credit or market consequences that may have an operational origin.

6.4.3.2. Operational Risk indicators

Dynamic management of OR requires not only a regular self-assessment of OR, but also the definition of a set of indicators to enable the changes in both the risk factors and the effectiveness of the controls to be measured over time, in order to have available information on unexpected changes and enable preventive management of Operational Risk.

Indicators can be associated with risks (Key Risk Indicators, KRI) or with controls (Key Control Indicators, KCI). To provide value, the KRIs must be associated with the causes of operational risk, which will lend them a predictive and proactive nature. An indicator associated with operational risk consequences, claims, losses, etc. generally overlaps with the SIRO database and with its regular analysis of trends, so it provides little value.

KCIs generate the additional value of measuring the control’s effectiveness over time and enable a more efficient and dynamic management of OR.

Page 126

6.4.3.3. Operational losses database

In line with the best practices and recommendations of the BIS, BBVA has procedures in place for collecting operational losses that occur both in the different Group entities and in other financial groups (ORX losses database, ORX News service, etc).

• Internal operational losses database - SIRO.

Through automatic interfaces with accounting and expense and manual capture procedure applications, this tool collects the accounting losses associated with OR events. The losses are captured with no amount limit and constitute an input for calculating the capital use for OR in advanced measurement approaches and a reference for the Risk and Control Self Assessment, and are analyzed on a regular basis in terms of trends and monitoring of expected losses.

• External operational losses database - ORX

The Bank, together with other leading entities worldwide, subscribed with the ORX consortium, as a founding partner, the creation of an external database for anonymously exchanging information related to operational events.

This consortium provides both quantitative and qualitative information on the operational events experienced by the member entities. The information obtained through this means is used both to identify potential ORs and analyze whether appropriate mitigation measures are available, and for the purpose of calculating capital using advanced measurement approaches.

6.4.3.4. Operational Risk scenarios

These reflect the exposure to a limited number of situations that may give rise to very significant losses with a reduced estimated frequency of occurrence. The scenarios feed the capital calculation in those Group areas that operate under advanced measurement approaches, and also constitute a reference for OR management.

6.4.4. Mitigation plans

Mitigation means to reduce the level of exposure to OR. Even though there is always the option of eliminating OR by exiting a given activity, the Group’s policy is to attempt to mitigate the risk first by improving the control environment or applying other measures, conducting a rigorous cost-benefit analysis. The different forms of mitigation always have associated costs. It is therefore fundamental to assess the cost of the OR properly before making a decision.

As long as the residual risk exceeds the defined target risk level, mitigation measures will need to be established to keep it within the level. The area responsible for OR will drive its implementation through the Operational Risk Management Committee.

6.4.5. Tools

The procedures and methodologies associated with this Operational Risk Management Policy are embedded in corporate tools that collateral compliance therewith. CORM is responsible for their development and implementation throughout the scope described in section 1.

Tools must be available to prepare quality reporting for the Group’s Management and Governing Bodies, Regulators, etc.

Page 127

All the information will be subjected to a continuous improvement process in order to adapt it to the needs of the Areas, the Group’s decision-making bodies, the Regulator or the new requirements envisaged in the future.

The OR Management Units (CORM, Country Operational Risk Management and Operational Risk Management in the Areas) are responsible for reporting the OR model.

6.5. Methods employed

As set out in Regulation (EU) 575/2013 of the European Parliament and of the Council, for calculating the regulatory capital for operational risk under Basel I, advanced measurement approaches (AMA method) are used for a very significant part of the banking perimeter. Specifically, this method is used in Spain and Mexico, which accumulate most of the Group’s assets.

In March 2010, BBVA Group received authorization from the Bank of Spain to apply advanced measurement approaches to the calculation of regulatory capital for operational risk in Spain and Mexico. Until 2011, the Group maintained a floor for the capital requirements produced by the internal model so they were not lower than the requirements of the standardized operational risk approach. Given the positive performance of the internal model since its approval, the Group requested that the Bank of Spain withdraw the floor referred to. Since the close of 2011, the Group calculates its capital requirements without the floor, although with what is still a partial recognition of the effect of diversification, which gives rise to more conservative estimates.

While the basic approach is still applied exceptionally, the standardized approach is used to calculate capital in the rest of the geographical areas.

6.6. Description of the advanced measurement approaches

The advanced internal model quantifies capital at a confidence level of 99.9% following the LDA methodology (Loss Distribution Approach). This methodology estimates the distribution of losses by operational event by convoluting the frequency distribution and the loss given default distribution of these events.

The calculations have been made using internal data on the Group’s historic losses as its main source of information. To enrich the data from this internal database and to take into account the impact of possible events not yet considered therein, external databases (ORX consortium) have been used and the scenarios indicated in point 6.4.3.4 have also been included.

The distribution of losses is constructed for each of the different types of operational risk, which are defined as per Basel Accord cells; i.e. a cross between business line and risk class. In those cases in which there is not sufficient data for a sound analysis, it becomes necessary to undertake cell aggregations, and to do so the business line is chosen as the axis.

In certain cases, a greater disaggregation of the Basel cell has been selected. The objective consists of identifying statistically homogenous groups and a sufficient amount of data for proper modeling. The definition of these groupings is regularly reviewed and updated.

Solvency regulations establish that regulatory capital for operational risk is determined as the sum of individual estimates by type of risk, but allowing the option of incorporating the effect of the correlation among them. This impact has been taken into consideration in BBVA estimates with a conservative approach.

Page 128

The model of calculating capital in both Spain and Mexico incorporates factors that reflect the business environment and situation of internal control systems. Thus the calculation obtained is higher or lower according to how these factors change in anticipating the result.

As regards other factors considered in the solvency regulations, current estimates do not include the mitigating effect of insurance.

The tables below show the operational risk capital requirements broken down according to the calculation models used and by geographical area, to provide a global vision of capital consumption for this type of risk:

TABLE 53: Regulatory capital for Operational Risk

(millions of euros) Regulatory capital for operational risk		2014				2013
	Advanced									1,266				1,310
Spain			811				796
Mexico			455				514
Standardized			942				975
Basic			145				136
BBVA Group total			2,352				2,421

The main variations in the capital requirements for operational risk are due to:

• Advanced measurement approach (€44 million): Reduction in the requirements for the implementation of methodological changes in the AMA approach, taking into account scenarios instead of factors from the operational risk assessment tool (EVRO).

• Non-advanced approaches (€24 million): Decrease due to the combined effect of the exchange rate (mainly the devaluation of the Venezuelan currency) and the reduction in net interest income.

The percentages of capital required for each approach is summarized below; the average percentage of capital required on net interest income stands at 9.9%.

CHART 25: Capital required by approach

Page 129

6.7. The Group’s Operational Risk profile

BBVA’s operational risk profile is shown below by class of risk after assessing the risks, resulting in the following distribution:

CHART 26: BBVA Group’s Operational Risk profile

The charts below show the distribution of historical operational losses by class of risk and country, revealing a concentration of losses as a result of the materialization of external fraud events and processes.

CHART 27: Operational Risk profile by risk and country

Page 130

6.8. Governance of the Operational Risk model

The role played by the different BBVA bodies in relation to the Group’s Operational Risk model is described below.

6.8.3. Board of Directors

As set out in article 17 of its Regulations, its powers include approving the risk control and management policy and regularly monitoring the internal information and control systems. This is therefore the body that sets and establishes the Group’s general profile and risk positioning, defining top-level general policies on this matter.

6.8.4. Executive Committee

The Executive Committee, under a delegation powers from the Board of Directors, is responsible for developing the corporate policies based on the general policies established by that body, and also monitors the Group’s risks on a regular basis to check that they are in line with those corporate policies.

6.8.5. Risk Committee

As set out in the Risk Committee Regulations, this body analyzes and assesses the proposals on the Group’s risk strategy and corporate policies and submits them to the Executive Committee for approval. It is also responsible for ensuring that the risks assumed match the established profile and for supervising compliance with the general policies set by the Board of Directors and the corporate policies developed by the Executive Committee.

6.8.6. Global Risk Management Committee

The Global Risk Management Committee (GRMC), as BBVA Group’s top executive body with respect to risks, develops the necessary strategies, policies, procedures and infrastructures for identifying, assessing, measuring and managing the material risks facing BBVA Group.

Page 131

6.8.7. Area ORM Committee

The Area Operational Risk Management Committee ensures that OR is managed in accordance with this policy and is the vehicle for mitigating OR in its field. The meetings are held at least quarterly. The Committee is chaired by the Area’s Director, and the Operational Risk Manager (ORM) acts as Secretary. Other members responsible for the Area and the Country’s Control Specialists attend the meetings. The Committee’s meetings are documented in minutes in accordance with a predefined content and its responsibilities are as follows:

• To endorse the Target Risk proposal put forward by the ORM for submission to and authorization by the Area’s Director.

• To ensure proper implementation and maintenance of the OR tools in the Area.

• To address the relevant aspects of the OR model.

• For the model’s risk factors with a gap between the residual risk and the target risk, to take mitigation decisions in accordance with the framework proposed by the Specialists and reflect them in action plans detailing the measures to be taken, the area responsible for undertaking them and the implementation schedule.

• To monitor the mitigation plans.

• To address any matter related to OR at the proposal of the Specialists.

6.8.8. Corporate Assurance

Aside from the above, the Group has designed a system called Corporate Assurance that constitutes one of the components of the Group’s Internal Control model and seeks to identify and prioritize the most relevant control weaknesses at Group and country level. To this end, Corporate Assurance establishes a governance scheme through a structure of committees, at both local and corporate level, to enable the smooth flow of information and support from Management to the business areas. This forum can be used by the specialists to raise any issues they deem appropriate so as to collateral an adequate control environment in the businesses.

Page 132

7. Equity investments and capital instruments not included in the trading book

Differentiation between portfolios held for sale and those held for strategic purposes

• Portfolios held for sale

• Portfolios held for strategic purposes

Accounting policies and instrument valuation

Book value of equity investments

Exposure in equity investments and capital instruments

7.1. Differentiation between portfolios held for sale and those held for strategic purposes

7.1.1. Portfolios held for sale

The portfolio held for sale is reflected in accounting terms by the entry entitled available-for-sale assets. In the case of capital instruments, this portfolio will include the capital instruments of institutions that are not strategic, which are not classified as the Group’s subsidiaries, associates, or jointly controlled businesses, and that have not been included in the fair value through profit or loss category.

7.1.2. Portfolios held for strategic purposes

The portfolio held for strategic purposes is included for accounting purposes under the heading of available-for-sale financial assets. An investment in capital instruments is considered strategic when it has been made with the intent of setting up or maintaining a long-term operating relationship with the subsidiary, although there is no significant influence on it, if at least one of the following situations is in place:

• Representation on the Board of Directors or equivalent management body in the subsidiary.

• Participation in the policy setting process, including those related to dividends and other payouts.

• The existence of significant transactions between the investing institution and the subsidiary.

• The exchange of senior management staff.

• The supply of expert information of an essential nature.

Page 133

7.2. Accounting policies and instrument valuation

The financial instruments contained in the available-for-sale financial assets portfolio are valued at their fair value both in their initial entry and on subsequent valuations.

Said changes are recorded in equity unless objective evidence exists that the fall in value is due to asset impairment, where the amounts recorded will be written-off from equity and they will be taken directly to the income statement.

The fair value is the price that would be received for selling an asset or paid for transferring a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants. It is therefore a market-based measurement, and not specific to each entity.

The fair value is reached without making any deduction in transaction costs that might be incurred due to sale or disposal by other means.

In the initial entry, the best evidence of fair value is the listing price on an active market. When these prices are not available, recent transactions on the same instrument will be consulted or the valuation will be made using mathematical measurement models that are sufficiently tried and trusted by the international financial community. In subsequent valuations, fair value will be obtained by one of the following methods:

• Prices quoted on active markets for the same instrument, i.e., without modification or reorganizing in any way.

• Prices quoted on active markets for similar instruments or other valuation techniques in which all the meaningful inputs are used based on directly or indirectly observable market data.

• Valuation techniques in which some meaningful input is not based on observable market data.

When it is not possible to reliably estimate a capital instrument’s fair value, it will be valued at its cost.

7.3. Value of equity investments and capital instruments

The accompanying table shows the book value, exposure and RWAs of portfolios held for sale and those held for strategic purposes:

Page 134

TABLE 54: Breakdown of book value, EAD and RWAs of equity investments and capital instruments

										12/31/2014
		Equity investments and capital instruments (1)
		Book value				EAD				RWA
AFS (2)			7,102				6,633				11,099
Permanent Investment (3)			4,234				4,063				10,764
Total			11,335				10,696				21,863

(1) The ‘Other financial assets with changes in P&L’ portfolio has no balance

(2) The difference between the book value and EAD is due to residual exposures whose capital use is calculated based on the credit risk models for the credit portfolio

(3) The book value of permanent investment by company is shown in the annexes to this document

										12/31/2013
		Equity investments and capital instruments
		Book value				EAD				RWA
AFS			5,525				5,440				8,024
Permanent Investment			4,880				3,377				5,464
Total			10,405				8,817				13,488

Of the total Permanent Investment Portfolio, there is only a listing price for the company Brunara, for the amount of 52 and 48 million euros as of December 31, 2014 and 2013, respectively.

7.4. Exposure in equity investments and capital instruments

The accompanying table shows the types, nature and amounts of the original exposures in equity investments listed or unlisted on a stock market, with an item differentiating sufficiently diversified portfolios and other unlisted instruments:

TABLE 55: Exposure in equity investments and capital instruments

						12/31/2014
		Type of Exposure (1)
(millions of euros) Item		Non-derivatives				Derivatives
Exchange-traded instruments			6,154				314
Non-exchange traded instruments			4,114				115
Included in sufficiently diversified portfolios			4,114				115
Other instruments			—				—
Total			10,267				429

Note (1): Depending on their nature, equity instruments not included in Trading Book Activity will be separated into derivatives and non-derivatives. The amount shown refers to original exposure, i.e. gross exposure of value corrections through asset impairment and provisions, before applying risk mitigation techniques.

Page 135

						12/31/2013
(millions of euros)		Type of Exposure (1)
Item		Non-derivatives				Derivatives
Exchange-traded instruments			5,216				204
Non-exchange traded instruments			3,289				109
Included in sufficiently diversified portfolios			3,289				109
Other instruments			—				—
Total			8,505				313

Note (1): See note in above table.

TABLE 56: Realized profit and loss from sales and settlements of equity investments and capital instruments

		2014												2013
€ million		Losses				Gains				Net				Losses				Gains				Net
AFS			10				165				155				59				220				161
Permanent Investment			0				27				28				2,601				64				-2,537

TABLE 57: Unrealized profit and loss for latent revaluation of equity investments and capital instruments

		P&L for latent revaluation in 2014
€ million		AFS
Balance Dec 2013			94
Transactions			772
Balance Dec 2014			866

Lastly, the trend and main changes in capital use are described for the positions subject to Equity Credit Risk:

TABLE 58: Breakdown of RWAs, equity investments and capital instruments by applicable approach

(millions of euros)		RWA ( millions of eures)
Concept		Internet Models				Simple method				PD/LGD Method				Total
31/12/2013			1.338				1,888				10.263				13.488
31/12/2014			1.613				9,838				10.413				21.863

Note (1): It includes shares in association and jointly-controlled entities

Page 136

TABLE 59: Variation in RWAs for Equity Risk

€ million
Equity Risk
RWAs Dec 13			13,488
Effects
Exposure changes			3,048
Changes in RW			0
Regulatory changes			5,286
Exchange rate			0
Other			44
RWAs Dec 14			21,865

The main changes are due to two reasons:

• Trends in the exposure: widespread increase in the market value of the positions, mainly China CITIC Bank (CNCB)

• Regulatory changes: The equity investments of the insurers of capital have not been deducted (because they do not exceed the thresholds); their entire value is calculated with a weighting of 250%, as indicated in article 470 of the CRR.

Page 137

8. Interest-rate risk

Nature of interest rate risk and key hypotheses

Variations in interest rates

8.1. Nature of interest rate risk and key hypotheses

The Group’s exposure to variations in market interest rates is one of the main financial risks linked to the pursuit of its banking operations. The risk of repricing, which stems from the difference between the periods for reviewing interest rates or the maturity of investment transactions vis-à-vis their financing, constitutes the basic interest rate risk to be considered. Nonetheless, other risks such as the exposure to changes in the slope and shape of interest-rate curves and the risk of optionality present in certain banking transactions are also taken into consideration by risk control mechanisms.

The sensitivity measurements of the Group’s net interest income and economic value in the face of variations in market interest rates are supplemented with forecast and stress scenarios and risk measurements using curve simulation processes, thereby allowing an assessment of the impact of changes on the slope, curvature and parallel movements of varying magnitude.

Especially important in the measurement of structural interest rate risk, which is carried out every month, is the establishment of hypotheses on the evolution and performance of certain items on the balance sheet, especially those involving products with no explicit or contractual due date.

The most significant of these hypotheses are those established on current and savings accounts, since they largely condition risk levels given the volume they represent within the liabilities of the Group’s financial institutions.

A prior step to the study of these liabilities necessarily involves “account segmentation.” To do so, the balances on the balance sheet are broken down by products, analyzed separately and subsequently grouped according to their common features, especially with regard to the type of customer and the criteria on the remuneration of each account, independently of the accounting standards on grouping.

A first stage involves analyzing the relationship between the trends in market interest rates and the interest rates of those accounts with no contractual due date. This relationship is established by means of models that show whether the account’s remuneration can be considered either fixed-rate (there is no relationship between the two variables) or variable-rate. In this latter case, an assessment is made of whether this relationship is produced with some form of delay and what the percentage impact of the variations in market interest rates is on the account’s interest rate.

Subsequently, an analysis is made of the changes over time of the balances in each category in order to establish their overall trend against the seasonal variations in the balance. It is assumed that these seasonal variations mature in the very short term, whereas the trend in the balance is assigned a long-term maturity. This prevents oscillations in the level of risks caused by momentary variations in balances, thus favoring the stability of balance-sheet management. This breakdown of amounts is made by the regressions that best adjust historical changes to the balance over time.

Page 138

Group companies have opted for different procedures to determine the maturity of transactional liabilities, taking into account the varying nature of markets and the availability of historical data. In the case of the Group, a descriptive analysis of the data is used to calculate the average contractual period of the accounts and the conditioned probability of maturity for the life cycle of the product. A theoretical distribution of maturities of the trend balance is then estimated for each of the products, based on the average life of the stock and the conditioned probability.

A further aspect to be considered in the model’s hypotheses is the analysis of the prepayments (implicit optionality) associated with certain positions, especially with the loan-book and mortgage portfolios. Changes in market interest rates, together with other variables, condition the incentives for the Bank’s customers to make an early prepayment of the loan granted, thus modifying the calendar of payments initially specified in the contract.

The analysis of historical information relating to loan prepayments, and to changes in interest rates, establishes the relationship between the two at any particular moment and estimates future prepayment in a given interest-rate scenario.

8.2. Variations in interest rates

The following tables present the average levels of interest-rate risk in terms of the sensitivity of net interest income and economic value for the Group’s main financial institutions in 2014.

TABLE 60: Variations in interest rates

		Impact on Net Interest Income (1)
		Increase of 100 basis points				Decrease of 100 basis points
Europe			+7.19	%			-5.63	%
BBVA Bancomer			+1.73	%			-1.36	%
BBVA Compass			+7.08	%			-5.00	%
BBVA Ads			+2.00	%			-1.85	%
BBVA GROUP			+3.60	%			-2.87	%

(1) Percentage relating to “1 year” net interest income forecast in each entity.

		Impact on Economic Value (1)
		Increase of 100 basis points				Decrease of 100 basis points
Europe			+2.40	%			-2.98	%
BBVA Bancomer			-3.50	%			+2.85	%
BBVA Compass			-1.85	%			-5.79	%
BBVA Ads			-2.56	%			+2.97	%
BBVA GROUP			+0.69	%			-2.26	%

(1) Percentage relating to each entity’s core capital

The negative exposure to a fall in interest rates is limited by the current level of the euro and dollar rates, very close to zero, which prevents the occurrence of extremely adverse scenarios. However, this is not the case with rise scenarios, which have a greater range, generating a positive asymmetry in potential results due to the positioning of the balance sheets.

Page 139

9. Liquidity and funding risk

Governance and monitoring

Liquidity and funding prospects

Assets committed in finance transactions

9.1. Governance and monitoring

The liquidity and planning strategy in the BBVA Group is executed with segregation of roles and responsibilities, with the areas involved optimizing risk management and decision-making being properly escalated to the various governing bodies. The areas and bodies that exercise the most relevant functions in managing liquidity and funding risk are determined.

The Balance Sheet Management unit, through ALCO, designs and executes the strategies to be implemented, using the internal risk metrics in accordance with the corporate model. The evaluation and execution of the actions in each one of the UGLs are carried out by ALCO and the Management units corresponding to these UGLs.

The Global Risk Management (GRM) corporate area acts as an independent unit that is responsible for monitoring and analyzing risks, standardizing risk management metrics and providing tools that can anticipate potential deviations from targets. It also monitors the level of compliance with the risk limits established by the Executive Committee and reports regularly to the Risk Management Committee, the Board of Directors’ Risk Committee and the Executive Committee, in accordance with the current corporate policy.

As for the new regulatory framework, the BBVA Group is continuing to develop a orderly plan to adapt to the regulatory ratios that will allow it to adopt best practices and the most effective and strictest criteria for their implementation sufficiently in advance.

One of these aspects is that the ratio will be included as a regulatory requirement not before October 1, 2015, associated with a demand for 60% compliance, which should reach 100% by January 2018. This reference was exceeded throughout 2014 in the successive calculations of the LCR for BBVA Group and maintained above 100%.

9.2. Liquidity and funding prospects

Management of structural funding and liquidity within BBVA Group is based on the principle of financial autonomy of the entities that make it up. This approach helps prevent and limit liquidity risk by reducing the Group’s vulnerability during periods of high risk. This decentralized management prevents possible contagion from a crisis affecting only one or a few BBVA Group entities, which must act independently to meet their liquidity requirements in the markets where they operate. Liquidity Management Units (UGLs) are set up in the geographical areas where the main foreign subsidiaries operate, and also for the parent company BBVA S.A

Page 140

A basic principle of liquidity management in BBVA Group is therefore the financial independence of its subsidiaries. The aim is to ensure that price formation reflects the cost of liquidity correctly. For this reason, the Bank maintains a liquidity fund at the individual level: Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria S.A. and its subsidiaries, including BBVA Compass, BBVA Bancomer and the Latin American subsidiaries.

The table below shows the liquidity available by instrument as of December 31, 2014 for the most significant units:

TABLE 61: Types and amounts of instruments included in the liquidity fund of the most significant units

(millions of euros)														12/31/2014
		BBVA Eurozone (1)				BBVA Bancomer				BBVA Compass				Other
Cash and deposits			7,967				5,069				1,606				6,337
Assets from credit transactions with central banks			44,282				4,273				21,685				7,234
Central government issues			18,903				1,470				4,105				6,918
Of which: Spanish government bonds			17,607				0				0				0
Other issues			25,379				2,803				1,885				316
Loans			0				0				15,695				0
Other non-eligible liquid assets			6,133				611				285				304
ACCUMULATED AVAILABLE BALANCE			58,382				9,953				23,576				13,875

(1): It includes BBVA S.A. and BBVA Portugal S.A.

(millions of euros)														12/31/2013
		BBVA Eurozone (1)				BBVA Bancomer				BBVA Compass				Other
Cash and deposits			10,826				6,159				1,952				6,843
Assets from credit transactions with central banks			32,261				3,058				9,810				7,688
Central government issues			16,500				229				904				7,199
Of which: Spanish government bonds			14,341				0				0				0
Other issues			15,761				2,829				2,224				489
Loans			0				0				6,682				0
Other non-eligible liquid assets			4,735				425				278				396
ACCUMULATED AVAILABLE BALANCE			47,823				9,642				12,040				14,927

(1): It includes BBVA S.A. and BBVA Portugal S.A.

As shown, the trend in available liquid assets has been favorable throughout the year, both in the euro zone, thanks to the increase in the available balance by more than €10,000 million due to the increase in the Fixed-Income Portfolio (essentially Available for Sale), and in the United States, where liquid assets have increased by more than €10,000 million due to the combined effect of growth in the portfolio of eligible loans and the release of the formerly pledged fixed-income portfolio.

In the case of Cash and Balances with Central Banks, the lower amount in the euro zone is offset by the larger amount of liquid assets available at Central Governments, given the reduced use of the policy.

The above shows that the Group has strengthened its liquidity position, increasing the stock of available liquid assets.

The Strategy and Finance area, through Balance Sheet Management, manages BBVA Group’s liquidity and funding, planning and executing the funding of the structural long-term gap of each UGL and proposing to ALCO the actions to be taken on this matter, in accordance with the policies and limits established by the Executive Committee.

The Group’s objective behavior, in terms of liquidity and funding risk, is measured through the Loan-to-Stable Customer Deposits (LtSCD) ratio. The aim is to preserve a stable funding structure in the medium term for each UGL making up BBVA Group, taking into account that maintaining an adequate volume of stable customer funds is key to achieving a sound liquidity profile.

Page 141

In order to establish the target (maximum) levels of LtSCD in each UGL and provide an optimal funding structure reference in terms of risk appetite, the corporate Structural Risks unit of GRM identifies and assesses the economic and financial variables that condition the funding structures in the different geographical areas.

The second element in liquidity and funding risk management is achieving a proper diversification of the wholesale funding structure, avoiding excessive reliance on short-term funding by establishing a maximum level of short-term wholesale funding raising.

The third main element is promoting the short-term resistance of the liquidity risk profile, collateraling that each UGL has sufficient collateral to deal with the risk of the close of wholesale markets.

The basic capacity is the short-term liquidity risk management and control metric, which is defined as the ratio between the available explicit assets and the maturities of wholesale liabilities and volatile funds, at different terms, with special relevance being given to 30-day maturities.

The above metrics are completed with a series of indicators and thresholds designed to avoid the concentration of wholesale funding by product, counterparty, market and term, and also to promote diversification by geographical area. Reference thresholds are also established on a series of leading indicators to anticipate situations of stress in the markets and adopt preventive measures as necessary.

In addition, stress analyses are a fundamental element of the liquidity and funding risk monitoring scheme, as they enable deviations from the liquidity targets and limits set in the appetite to be anticipated. They also play a major role in the design of the Liquidity Contingency Plan and the definition of specific measures to be adopted to rectify the risk profile if necessary. For each scenario, it is verified whether the Entity has a sufficient stock of liquid assets to collateral its capacity to meet the liquidity commitments/outflows in the different periods analyzed. Four scenarios are considered in the analysis: one central and three crisis-related (systemic crisis; unexpected internal crisis with a considerable rating downgrade and/or affecting the ability to issue in wholesale markets and the perception of business risk by the banking intermediaries and the Entity’s customers; and a mixed scenario, as a combination of the two aforementioned scenarios).

Each scenario considers the following factors: the liquidity existing in the market, customer behavior and sources of funding, impact of rating downgrades, market values of liquid assets and collateral, and the interaction between liquidity requirements and the development of the Bank’s asset quality. The results of these stress tests conducted on a regular basis reveal that BBVA maintains a sufficient buffer of liquid assets to deal with the estimated liquidity outflows in a scenario resulting from the combination of a systemic crisis and an unexpected internal crisis, with a significant downgrade of the Entity’s rating by up to three notches.

The following is a breakdown of maturities of wholesale issues on the euro balance sheet by the nature of the issues:

Page 142

TABLE 62: Maturity of wholesale issues by nature

(millions of euros)																		12/31/2014
Maturities of wholesale issues		2015				2016				2017				After 2017				Total
Senior debt			6,273				3,377				393				4,245				14,288
Mortgage-covered bonds			4,279				4,928				7,074				10,210				26,491
Public-covered bonds			—				—				526				500				1,026
Regulatory capital instruments (1)			1,027				208				70				6,322				7,627
Other long-term financial instruments			—				151				250				860				1,261
Total general			11,579				8,664				8,313				22,137				50,693

(1): Regulatory capital instruments are classified in this table by terms according to their contractual maturity.

(millions of euros)																		12/31/2013
Maturities of wholesale issues		2014				2015				2016				After 2016				Total
Senior debt			4,630				5,544				2,163				3,219				15,556
Mortgage-covered bonds			6,905				4,444				5,123				16,568				33,040
Public-covered bonds			1,305				—				150				984				2,439
Regulatory capital instruments (1)			—				63				207				4,789				5,059
Other long-term financial instruments			1				0				152				710				863
Total general			12,841				10,051				7,795				26,270				56,957

(1): Regulatory capital instruments are classified in this table by terms according to their contractual maturity.

As can be seen in the above tables, there is a decrease in wholesale funding of €6,500 million derived from the combined effect of the repayment of mortgage-covered and public-covered bonds for €8,000 million and the increase in regulatory capital instruments for €1,500 million.

In 2014, the wholesale funding markets, both long and short-term, have remained stable thanks to the positive trend in sovereign risk premiums and the setting of negative interest rates by the ECB in the marginal deposit facility, in an environment of heightened uncertainty over growth in the euro zone, which has prompted the ECB to take further measures. At its meeting on June 5, 2014, the ECB announced non-standard measures aimed at increasing inflation, boosting credit and improving the financial conditions for the European economy. The first two targeted longer-term refinancing operation (TLTRO) auctions took place in September and December 2014, at which BBVA borrowed €2,600 million at each one.

BBVA continues to maintain an adequate funding structure in the short, medium and long term, diversified by products. Over the year, issues for €8,613 million were completed and the position vis-à-vis the ECB was reduced significantly, with the early repayment of the total amount of the long-term refinancing operations (LTRO). In 2014, the Bank’s improved liquidity and funding profile has enabled it to increase the survival period in each of the stress scenarios analyzed.

The situation of the rest of UGLs outside Europe has also been very positive, as the liquidity position has once again been bolstered in all the geographical areas where the Group operates. Special mention should be made of the senior debt issue completed by BBVA Compass, which after seven years away from the markets has placed a total of $1,000 million at 3 and 5 years.

In this context of improved access to the market, BBVA has maintained its objectives of, on the one hand, strengthening the funding structure of the Group’s various franchises based on growing its self-funding from stable customer funds, and on the other, collateraling a sufficient buffer of fully available liquid assets, diversifying the different sources of funding and optimizing the generation of collateral to deal with situations of tension in the markets. In this regard, the exposure to liquidity risk has been kept within the risk appetite and the limits approved by the Board of Directors.

Page 143

9.3. Assets committed in finance transactions

As of December 31, 2014, the assets committed (provided as collateral or security with respect to certain liabilities) and those unencumbered are as follows:

TABLE 63: Assets committed or unencumbered

		Million euros
2014 Assets		Committed assets Book value				Uncommitted assets Book value
Assets			130,585				501,357
Equity instruments			3,602				10,706
Debt securities			54,454				74,433
Other assets			72,530				416,217

The assets committed correspond mainly to loans linked to the issue of mortgage-covered bonds, public-covered bonds and long-term securitized bonds (see Note 21.3 to the Group’s Annual Consolidated Financial Statements); debt securities delivered under repurchase agreements; and pledged collateral and loans or debt instruments to have access to certain funding transactions with central banks. Collateral provided to collateral derivative operations is also included as committed assets.

As of December 31, 2014, the collateral received mainly for repurchase agreements or security lending and the collateral that could largely be committed with the aim of obtaining funding, is as follows:

TABLE 64: Collateral committed or potentially committed

		Million euros
2014 Collateral assigned		Fair value of committed collateral assigned or treasury stock Issued				Fair value of collateral assigned or treasury stock Issued available for commitment
Collateral received			18,496				4,899
Equity instruments			1				78
Debt securities			16,496				3,673
Other collateral assigned			—				947
Treasury stock issued, except for public-covered bonds or securitized bonds			—				534

As of December 31, 2014, the associated financial liabilities issued are as follows:

TABLE 65: Committed assets/collateral assigned and associated liabilities

		Million euros
2014 Committed assets / collateral assigned and associated liabilities		Liabilities hedged, contingent liabilities or title ceded				Assets, collateral assigned and treasury stock issued, except for mortgage- covered bonds and committed securitized bonds.
Book value of those financial liabilities			136,372				149,082

Page 144

10. Leverage Ratio

Leverage Ratio definition and composition

Trends in the ratio

Governance

10.1. Leverage Ratio definition and composition

The leverage ratio is a regulatory measure (not risk-based) complementing capital designed to collateral the soundness and financial strength of institutions in terms of indebtedness.

This ratio is defined as the quotient of eligible Tier 1 capital and exposure. The drivers that determine the amount of this ratio are described below in greater detail.

• Tier 1 capital: section 2.2 of this document presents details of the eligible capital, which has been calculated based on the criteria defined in the CRR.

The amount of eligible Tier 1 capital amounts to €41,938 million.

• Exposure: as set out in article 429 of the CRR, the exposure measurement generally follows the book value subject to the following considerations:

• On-balance-sheet exposures other than derivatives are included net of provisions and accounting valuation adjustments.

• The measurement of the Bank’s total exposure is made up of the sum of the following items:

a) On-balance-sheet positions (excluding derivatives and repos, which are considered later): the book balance of assets corresponding to the financial statements is included, excluding the aforementioned headings.

b) Adjustments for differences in the scope of consolidation: the balance resulting from the difference between the accounting balance sheet and the regulatory balance sheet is included.

c) Exposures in derivatives: the exposure referred to the EAD used in the measurement of capital use for counterparty risk is included, which includes both the exposure (net of offsets and collaterals) and the adjustment for future potential risk (add-on).

d) Securities financing transactions (SFT): the EAD adjusted for collateral value and other haircuts is included, as established in article 220 of the CRR.

e) Off-balance-sheet items: these correspond to risks and contingent liabilities and commitments associated with collaterals, which are mainly available. A minimum floor of 10% is applied to the conversion factors (CCF), in line with article 429, section 10 a) of the CRR.

Page 145

f) Tier 1 deductions: all those amounts of assets that have been deducted in the determination of the eligible Tier 1 capital are deducted, in order not to duplicate exposures. The main deductions are intangible assets, loss carry forwards and other deductions defined in article 36 of the CRR and indicated in section 2.2 of this report.

g) Investments in banking, financial, insurance and commercial institutions that are outside the prudential consolidation scope: as set out in article 429, section 4, the sum of the exposure values (on and off-balance-sheet) of all the exposures of the financial sector institution in which a significant investment is held must be considered. This involves considering the ratio within the exposure, mainly the balance comprising the companies BBVA Seguros y Reaseguros and Pensiones Bancomer.

The table below shows a breakdown of all the elements that make up the leverage ratio.

To obtain the exposure, the book balances reported in the Group’s Report are taken, including all the additional adjustments described earlier, to arrive at the exposure to be considered in the estimation of the leverage ratio:

TABLE 66: Elements comprising the leverage ratio

Ref		Items		Phased-in				Fully-loaded
a)		Accounting assets			631,942				631,942
		Derivatives (-)			-46,780				-46,780
		Securities financing transactions Assets (-)			-17,639				-17,639
		Net accounting assets			567,523				567,523
b)		Dif. Accounting vs Prudential Perimeter*			1,745				1,745
		* Excludes the derivatives and repos of both perimeters.
c)		EAD Derivatives			26,222				26,222
d)		EAD securities financing transactions (Assets)*			9,854				9,854
		* It is adjusted for collateral and regulatory haircuts
e)		Contingent Liabilities and Commitments			147,423				147,423
		CCF adjustment (%)			37	%			37	%
		Contingent Liabilities and Commitments adjusted for CCF			54,402				54,402
f)		Tier 1 deductions			-9,431				-10,667
g)		Exposure to financial institutions and insurance companies			20,991				20,991
Exposure (a+b+c+d+f+g)					671,307				670,071
Tier 1					41,832				39,037
Leverage Ratio					6.23	%			5.83	%

As can be seen, the Group maintains a phased leverage ratio of 6.23% and a fully-loaded ratio of 5.83%, well above the minimum level required.

Page 146

10.2. Trends in the ratio

The chart below shows how the ratio has remained stable throughout the year, due mainly to limited volatility and a sustainable development of both exposure and regulatory capital. In addition, the development of the macro variables and other external aspects has not originated relevant impacts on the exposure.

CHART 28: Trends in the leverage ratio

10.3. Governance

The activities making up the Group’s regulatory reporting include the monthly measurement and control of the leverage ratio by assessing and monitoring this measurement in its more restrictive version (fully-loaded), to collateral that leverage remains far from the minimum levels (which could be considered risk levels), without undermining the return on investment.

The estimates and the development of the leverage ratio are reported on a regular basis to different governing bodies and committees to collateral an adequate control of the entity’s leverage levels and ongoing monitoring of the main capital indicators.

In line with the risk appetite framework and structural risk management, the Group operates by establishing limits and operational measures to achieve a sustainable development and growth of the balance sheet, maintaining at all times tolerable risk levels. This can be seen in the fact that the regulatory leverage level itself is well above the minimum required levels.

Page 147

11. Information on remuneration

Information on the decision-making process for establishing the remuneration policy for the Identified Staff

Description of the different types of employees and executive officers included in the Identified Staff

Key features of the remuneration system

Information on the connection between the remuneration of the Identified Staff and the Group’s performance

Description of the criteria used for taking into consideration present and future risks in the remuneration process

The main parameters and reasons for any component of the possible variable remuneration plans and other non-monetary advantages; specifically, the measures adopted for the members of the Identified Staff who are responsible for control functions.

Ratios between the fixed and variable remuneration of the Identified Staff

Quantitative information on the remuneration of the Identified Staff

As set out in article 85 of Act 10/2014, dated June 26, on the regulation, supervision and solvency of credit institutions, the entities will make available to the public and update on a regular basis (at least once a year) the information on their remuneration policy and practices set out in part 8 of Regulation 575/2013/EU in relation to those categories of staff whose professional activities may have a significant impact on their risk profile or are responsible for control functions (hereinafter the “Identified Staff”).

11.1. Information on the decision-making process for establishing the remuneration policy for the Identified Staff

As set out in BBVA’s Bylaws, the Board Regulations stipulate that one of the powers of the Board of Directors is to approve the remuneration policy for senior executives and employees whose professional activities may have a material impact on the Entity’s risk profile and to determine directors’ remuneration, and, in the case of executive directors, the remuneration for their executive functions and other terms and conditions set out in their contracts.

The Regulations of the Board of Directors of BBVA set out the internal rules for the operation of the Board and its Committees, which provide assistance on matters within their competence. The Remuneration Committee assists the Board with matters related to remuneration as set out in the Board Regulations, ensuring compliance with the remuneration policy established.

Page 148

As set out in Article 36 of the Regulations of the Bank’s Board of Directors, the Remuneration Committee performs the following functions:

• Propose to the Board of Directors, for submission to the General Meeting, the remuneration policy for directors, in terms of items and amounts, the parameters for its determination and the payment system. It will also submit its corresponding report as set out in applicable law.

• Determine the extent and amount of the individual remuneration, entitlements and other economic rewards, as well as the contractual terms and conditions, for the executive directors, submitting the relevant proposals to the Board of Directors.

• Propose on an annual basis to the Board of Directors the annual report on the remuneration of the Bank’s directors, which will be submitted to the Annual General Meeting as set out in applicable legislation.

• Propose to the Board of Directors the remuneration policy for senior executives and those employees whose professional activities may have a material impact on the Company’s risk profile.

• Propose to the Board the basic terms and conditions of the contracts of senior executives and directly supervise the remuneration of senior officers responsible for risk management and compliance functions in the Company.

• Oversee enforcement of the remuneration policy established by the Company and periodically review the remuneration policy applied to directors, senior officers and employees whose professional activities may have a material impact on the Company’s risk profile.

• Any others that may have been assigned under these Regulations or conferred by a decision of the Board of Directors or by applicable legislation.

As of the date of this report, the Remuneration Committee was composed of five members, all of them non-executive directors; the majority are independent, including its chairman.

TABLE 67: Composition of the Remuneration Committee

Name and surname(s)		Position		Status
Carlos Loring Martínez de Irujo		Chairman		Independent
Tomás Alfaro Drake		Member		Independent
Ignacio Ferrero Jordi		Member		External
José Maldonado Ramos		Member		External
Juan Pi Llorens		Member		Independent

In the exercise of its functions, the BBVA Remuneration Committee met four times in 2014 to deal with matters that fall under its responsibility.

In relation to the determination of the remuneration of Identified Staff, the matters analyzed include direct supervision of the remuneration of managers in the Risk and Compliance areas and review of the application of the remuneration policy for Identified Staff, including directors and members of senior management.

The Board of Directors of BBVA also approved on February 3, 2015, as per the proposal submitted by the Remuneration Committee, the 2014 Annual Report on Remuneration of BBVA Directors, in accordance with the new framework established by the Spanish Securities and Exchange Commission (CNMV) through Circular 4/2013, dated June 12. This Report will be put to the vote at the Annual General Meeting to be held on March 13, 2015, as set out in article 541 of Royal Legislative Decree 1/2010, dated July 2, which approves the amended text of the Corporations Act (hereinafter the “Corporations Act”), and is available on the Company’s website (www.bbva.com) from the date of calling the General Meeting.

Page 149

The Annual Report on the Remuneration of BBVA Directors includes a description of the basic principles of the Bank’s remuneration policy with respect to the members of the Board of Directors, whether executive or non-executive, as well as a detailed presentation of the different elements and amounts making up their remuneration. It has been prepared in accordance with BBVA’s Bylaws and the Board of Directors’ Regulations. The Report also includes the principles and basic elements of the Bank’s general remuneration policy.

Likewise, the Board of Directors of BBVA, at the meeting held on February 3, 2015, as set out in article 17 of the Board Regulations, approved, at the proposal of the Remuneration Committee, and considering the best practices and recommendations at local and international level, certain amendments to the remuneration policy applicable to the Identified Staff for the years 2015, 2016 and 2017. These amendments maintain many of the elements of the previous settlement and payment system for the variable remuneration of the Identified Staff (such as payment of a percentage in shares, the deferred payment of a percentage of variable remuneration, mandatory retention periods for the shares, malus, clauses etc.), but including elements aimed at better aligning remuneration with the objectives of profitability and recurrence, liquidity and funding and long-term solvency of the Group, strengthening the principle of prudent risk management, as well as greater correspondence between variable remuneration and the sustainability of earnings in the medium and long term, and seeking increased transparency. The new elements include:

• An increase in the number and types of indicators used to calculate variable remuneration.

• Greater correspondence between variable remuneration and the risk metrics, reinforcing their alignment with prudent risk management.

• A greater weight of the multiannual indicators in the determination of variable remuneration and the reinforcement of the assessment of long-term results.

• Reinforcement of the deferred period for variable remuneration payment.

• Increased transparency in the calculation of variable remuneration.

Based on the above, the Board of Directors, at the proposal of the Remuneration Committee, has also approved the Remuneration Policy for BBVA Directors that will apply for the years 2015, 2016 and 2017, and which in accordance with article 529r of the Corporations Act will be put to the vote at the Annual General Meeting on March 13, 2015 as a separate item on the agenda. The text of the Remuneration Policy for BBVA Directors is available on the Company’s website (www.bbva.com) from the date of calling the General Meeting.

As already indicated, BBVA has a decision-making system for remuneration matters in which the Remuneration Committee plays a key role. It is responsible for determining the amount of fixed and variable remuneration for the executive directors and the remuneration policy applicable to the Identified Staff, including the members of the Group’s senior management; it then submits the corresponding proposals to the Board.

To perform its functions, in 2014 the Remuneration Committee and the Board of Directors have been supported by the Bank’s internal services and the information provided by two of the leading global consultants on remuneration for board members and senior officers, Towers Watson and McLagan (belonging to the AonHewitt group).

The Remuneration Committee conducts an annual review of the application of the remuneration policy approved by the Bank’s Board of Directors, as established in Article 33.2 of the aforementioned Act 10/2014.

Page 150

The Remuneration Committee is also assisted by the Board’s Risk Committee, which in accordance with article 39 of the Board Regulations has participated in the establishment of the remuneration policy, checking that it is compatible with adequate and effective risk management and does not offer incentives for assuming risks that exceed the Company’s acceptable level.

Lastly, the decisions related to the remuneration of executive directors, when required by law, are submitted to the Bank’s Annual General Meeting for approval.

This system ensures an adequate decision-making process on questions of remuneration. In 2014 the members of the Remuneration Committee received an aggregate total of €278,000 for their work on it. In addition, the Report on the Remuneration of BBVA Directors includes a breakdown of the remuneration by item for each director.

11.2. Description of the different types of employees and executive officers included in the Identified Staff

As set out in article 32.2 of Act 10/2014, BBVA has determined the professionals affected by this regulation (Identified Staff) following the criteria established by European Regulation 604/2014, dated March 4, of the Commission, which are grouped into two main blocks: qualitative criteria (defined around the position’s responsibility and the employee’s capacity to assume risks) and quantitative criteria (namely, having received total annual remuneration of 500,000 euros or more; being within the 0.3% with the highest total remuneration in the Group; or having received total remuneration higher than the lowest total remuneration set out in the qualitative criteria).

For these purposes, for 2014 this group includes:

• Members of the Board of Directors, executive directors and non-executive directors

• Senior Management: members of the Management Committee

• Professionals responsible for control functions and risk takers by function: This group is set up by functions that correspond to the qualitative criteria established in article 3 of Regulation EU 604/2014 of the European Commission, points 4 to 15 inclusive.

• Risk takers by remuneration: Made up of employees who meet the quantitative criteria of article 4 of Regulation EU 604/2014.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, BBVA will adapt the definition of Identified Staff, including categories of professionals as necessary, based on the requirements set out by applicable regulations.

11.3. Key features of the remuneration system

The remuneration system applicable to the Identified Staff in BBVA contains a series of special features as compared with the one applicable to the rest of staff, since a special variable incentive system has been established for this group, aligned with legal requirements, recommendations and best market practices, as described later.

According to BBVA’s remuneration policy, the remuneration system is made up of:

Page 151

1. Fixed remuneration

Fixed remuneration in BBVA is established by taking into consideration the employee’s level of responsibility and professional career history in the Group. A benchmark salary is fixed for each function that reflects its value for the Organization. This benchmark salary is defined by analyzing what is fair internally and comparing it with the market through the advice of leading firms specializing in remuneration.

The fixed component in the employee’s total remuneration represents a sufficiently high proportion to allow maximum flexibility with respect to the variable components.

2.- Variable remuneration

BBVA’s variable remuneration represents a key element in the Bank’s remuneration policy, as it rewards the creation of value in the Group through each of the areas and units that make up BBVA. In short, it rewards individuals and teams and their combined contributions to the Group’s recurrent earnings.

The annual variable remuneration in BBVA for 2014 was made up of ordinary variable remuneration paid in cash and a share-based variable remuneration (hereinafter “Annual Variable Remuneration”). It has been designed to reflect the interests of shareholders, prudent risk management and generation of long-term value.

The essential aspects of Annual Variable Remuneration in 2014 are detailed below:

2.a) Ordinary variable remuneration in cash.

BBVA’s ordinary variable remuneration model for 2014 is based on a series of value creation indicators established for each unit. The variable remuneration to be paid to the members of the unit in question depends on these indicators, and on the results for the unit’s area and those of the Group as a whole. The distribution of the remuneration between the staff members is based on individual performance, which is calculated through an individual evaluation of the indicators.

The unit indicators used are of two types: each unit’s own financial and non-financial indicators.

BBVA considers that prudent risk management is a key element within its variable remuneration policy. That is why it has established recurrent Economic Value Added (EVA) as one of the main financial indicators used to calculate the ordinary variable remuneration of all its workforce.

Technically, EVA is recurring economic profit minus the cost of capital used in each business or the rate of return expected by investors.

Economic profit differs from accounting profit because of the use of economic criteria rather than regulatory accounting criteria in some operations.

It can therefore be said that conceptually, EVA is the recurring economic profit generated above market expectations in terms of capital remuneration.

As set out in the Guidelines on Remuneration Policies and Practices issued by the Committee of European Banking Supervisors (now the European Banking Association – EBA) on December 10, 2010⁵, this indicator is regarded as an appropriate way of evaluating results, as it incorporates adjustments for current and future risks and the cost of capital.

⁵  Section 96 of the Guidelines on Remuneration Policies and Practices of December 2010.

Page 152

It has also been established that indicators of the units responsible for control functions (Internal Audit, Legal Compliance, Global Accounting & Information Management, General Secretary, Risks and Human Resources) should have a greater weight than the financial indicators. This is in order to make the staff who are responsible for the control functions more independent with respect to the areas supervised.

Thus, BBVA’s ordinary variable remuneration combines the employees’ results (financial and non-financial) with those of their Unit, the Area to which they belong and the Group as a whole; and it uses the EVA indicator, which takes into account both present and future risks, and the capital cost incurred to obtain those profits.

2.b) Variable share-based remuneration.

The variable shared-based remuneration for 2014 has been based on an incentive in shares approved by the management team consisting of an annual allocation to each executive manager of a number of units that served as a basis for determining the number of shares to grant on the date of settlement of the incentive. The number was linked to the level of compliance with a series of indicators at Group level, determined every year.

For 2014, the indicators approved by the General Meeting were related to:

• The Total Shareholder Return (TSR), which measures the return on investment for the shareholder as the sum of the change in share price plus dividends and other similar items received by shareholders in a reference period from January 1, 2012 to December 31, 2014.

• The Group’s recurring Economic Value Added (EVA) without one-offs. As explained above, this includes adjustments for current and future risks.

• The Group’s net attributable profit without one-offs.

The number of units initially assigned to each beneficiary in the system will be divided into three parts, each associated with a weighted indicator. It will be multiplied by coefficients of between 0 and 2 in accordance with a scale defined annually for each of them.

In the case of TSR the coefficient applied in 2014 has been zero, as the Bank has occupied a final position below the average of its peer group set by the Meeting in March 2014. This reinforces the alignment of variable remuneration with shareholder interests.

2.c) Settlement and payment system for annual variable remuneration

According to the specific settlement and payment system for annual variable remuneration in 2014 that applies to the Identified Staff:

• At least 50% of the total variable remuneration in 2014 for the Identified Staff will be paid in BBVA shares.

• 50% of the ordinary variable remuneration for the Identified Staff who do not receive the incentive for the management team will be paid in BBVA shares.

• Payment of 40% of their annual variable remuneration, both from the part in cash and the part paid in shares, will be deferred. The deferred amount will be paid out in thirds over the next three years. The percentage deferred increases in the case of executive directors and members of senior management, up to 50% of their annual variable remuneration.

Page 153

• All the shares that are delivered according to the aforementioned rules may not be used for a period of one year starting from the date of their provision. This retention is applied on the net amount of the shares, after discounting the part necessary to make the tax payment for the shares received. Using the shares delivered which are unavailable and the shares pending delivery for hedging purposes is also prohibited.

• The deferred parts of the annual variable remuneration in 2014 will be updated as established by the Board of Directors.

• Lastly, the variable component of the remuneration for a year for the Identified Staff will be limited to a maximum amount of 100% of the fixed component of total remuneration, except for those positions approved by the General Meeting, which may reach up to 200%.

In addition, the parts of the annual variable remuneration that are deferred and pending payment in accordance with the above rules will not be paid to the members of the Identified Staff if one of the following circumstances occurs before the payment date (“malus clauses”):

• If the beneficiary has not generated the right to ordinary variable remuneration for the year as a result of the effect on the year’s earnings of transactions accounted for in previous years which generated the right to payment of the ordinary variable remuneration.

• If the beneficiary has been sanctioned for a serious breach of the code of conduct or other applicable internal rules, in particular related to risks.

• If the contractual relationship has been terminated, except in the case of retirement, early retirement, declaration of permanent incapacity for employment to any degree, or death: in these cases the right to payment shall be maintained under the same terms as if the employee had remained active.

In addition, if in one year the BBVA Group had negative financial results (presented losses), not including one-off results, the beneficiaries will not receive either the Annual Variable Remuneration corresponding to the year of the losses, or the deferred amounts that were payable for the year in which the annual accounts reflecting these negative results were approved.

In any event, the variable remuneration shall be paid only if it is sustainable with respect to the BBVA Group’s situation as a whole and if it is justified by its results.

Starting in 2015, and to achieve better alignment with the best market practices, regulatory requirements and internal organization and strategy, the Bank’s Board of Directors, at the proposal of the Remuneration Committee, as indicated previously, has approved a series of amendments to the remuneration policy for the Identified Staff for the years 2015, 2016 and 2017, in line with the Remuneration Policy for directors that will be submitted to the General Meeting for consideration. These amendments will involve a series of changes to the described system of settlement and payment of annual variable remuneration for the Identified Staff. These amendments can be summed up as follows:

• The variable components of remuneration (ordinary variable remuneration and incentive in shares) are unified in a single annual incentive based on value creation indicators that combine the employee’s results (financial and non-financial) and those of their Unit, the Area they belong to and the Group as a whole (“Annual Variable Remuneration”);

Page 154

• 50% of the Annual Variable Remuneration will be paid in BBVA shares, taking the share price established by the Board of Directors as a reference for paying the part in shares;

• If the conditions are met, 60% of the Annual Variable Remuneration –50% in the case of executive directors and members of senior management–will be paid in equal parts in cash and in shares during the first quarter of the year following the year in which such remuneration is due;

• The rest will be deferred in its entirety for a period of 3 years, and its accrual and payment will be subject to a series of multiannual indicators related to the performance of the BBVA share and the Group’s fundamental risk metrics, calculated over the 3-year period of deferment;

• The multiannual evaluation indicators have associated achievement scales which, in the event of failing to reach the goals set for each one, may reduce the deferred amount of Annual Variable Remuneration, never increase it, and may even result in the loss of the beneficiary’s entire deferred amount;

• The shares may not be used for a period of time from their delivery. This retention is applied on the resulting number of shares, after discounting the part necessary to make the tax payment;

• No hedging transactions may be carried out on the shares received as Annual Variable Remuneration or on those deferred and pending receipt;

• Payment of the variable remuneration may be limited or prevented in certain cases (malus clauses);

• The deferred component of the Annual Variable Remuneration finally settled will be updated as established by the Board of Directors; and

• The variable component of the remuneration for a year for the Identified Staff will be limited to a maximum amount of 100% of the fixed component of total remuneration, unless the General Meeting decides to increase that limit to 200%, as set out in Act 10/2014.

As indicated earlier, the remuneration system described applies to the Identified Staff, which includes the Bank’s executive directors.

Notwithstanding the foregoing, BBVA’s remuneration policy for the members of the Board of Directors makes a distinction between the remuneration system for executive directors and the system applicable to non-executive directors, as set out in the Bank’s Bylaws.

A detailed description of the remuneration system applicable to BBVA’s non-executive directors is included in the Remuneration Policy for BBVA Directors and in the Annual Report on the Remuneration of Directors. As set out in those documents, non-executive directors do not receive variable remuneration; they receive a fixed annual amount in cash for holding the position of director and another for the members of the various Committees, with a greater weight being given to the exercise of the function of chairman of each Committee, and the amount depending on the nature of the functions attributed to each Committee.

Page 155

In addition, the Bank has a remuneration system for its non-executive directors with deferred delivery of shares, approved by the Annual General Meeting, that also constitutes fixed remuneration. It consists of the annual allocation to those directors, as part of their remuneration, of a number of “theoretical shares” of the Bank that will be effectively delivered, where applicable, on the date of their termination as directors for any cause other than serious breach of their obligations. The annual number of “theoretical shares” to be allocated to each non-executive director will be equivalent to 20% of the total remuneration in cash received by each in the previous year. This is based on the average closing prices of the BBVA share during the 60 trading sessions prior to the dates of the ordinary General Meetings approving the financial statements for each year.

11.4. Information on the connection between the remuneration of the Identified Staff and the performance of the Group

As specified above, in 2014 the amount of variable remuneration received by BBVA’s Identified Staff has been determined by the following factors:

• The Group’s financial results.

• The financial results and strategic projects in each business area.

• The financial results and the unit’s own indicators (not financial).

• The individual’s financial and non-financial targets.

The ordinary variable incentives in 2014 of the executive directors have been determined by the Group’s results, based on the recurrent EVA without one-offs in constant euros, the net attributable profit without one-offs and the recurrent efficiency ratio without one-offs in constant euros. The purpose of the incentives system is to ensure that the amount of variable remuneration associated with each indicator does not vary in the event that the same result is obtained as in the previous year; if the results of the previous year are repeated for one indicator, in standardized terms, the bonus associated with it will be the same.

Similarly, the ordinary variable incentives of senior management are linked to both the Group’s results and those of their management area.

For the rest of the members of the Identified Staff, the amount of variable remuneration depends on individual performance, results in the Area in which they provide their service, and the Group’s results overall.

In 2014, the Group’s earnings (net attributable profit without one-offs and recurrent EVA without one-offs) determined 50% of the final incentives for the Management Team. The other 50% has been determined by Total Shareholder Return (TSR), which as indicated for the incentive for 2014 was measured over a period of 3 years.

In addition, as mentioned earlier, among the “malus clauses” it has been established that if in one year the BBVA Group had negative financial results (presented losses), not including one-off results, the beneficiaries will not receive neither the Annual Variable Remuneration corresponding to the year of the losses, nor the deferred amounts that were payable for the year in which the financial statements reflecting these negative results were approved.

However, any variable remuneration that is pending payment will always be paid, provided that such payment is sustainable in terms of the situation of the BBVA Group as a whole.

Page 156

11.5. Description of the criteria used for taking into consideration present and future risks in the remuneration process

As explained above, the remuneration policy for the Identified Staff is aligned with shareholders’ interests and with prudent risk management, and in 2014 includes the following elements:

• Use of the Group’s recurring EVA as a metric for evaluating earnings used as a base to determine ordinary variable remuneration. EVA considers the level of risk incurred and the cost of capital, measuring the sustained generation of value for shareholders and complying with the principle of prudent risk management. Indicator that is also included in the calculation of variable share-based remuneration (Management Team Incentive).

• The indicator is based on the level of risk assumed and the cost of capital.

• EVA takes into consideration the majority of risks assumed through the calculation of Economic Capital at Risk (ECaR).

• ECaR reflects the minimum level of protection demanded against unexpected future losses by the different types of risk. Thus EVA not only includes the expected losses for the year, but also the risk of future losses.

• BBVA measures and monitors liquidity risk, which is also taken into account for incentive payments, to the extent that a premium is transferred to the income statements of the business areas that includes the liquidity cost.

• Use of TSR, which measures the shareholder return on investment, as the main indicator determining variable share-based remuneration for the management team.

• Payment in shares of at least 50% of the variable remuneration.

• Deferment clauses, designed to ensure that a substantial part of the variable remuneration (between 40% and 50%) is deferred for a period of 3 years, thus taking into account the economic cycle and business risks.

• Obligatory withholding periods of any shares delivered as variable remuneration, so that beneficiaries may not freely dispose of them until one year after their delivery date.

• Clauses that prevent or limit the payment of variable remuneration (both deferred remuneration and remuneration corresponding to a year), as a result of both actions involving the individual recipient and the results of the Group as a whole (“malus clauses”).

• Limitation of the amount of variable remuneration to a percentage of the fixed remuneration.

.

Page 157

11.6. The main parameters and reasons for any component of the possible variable remuneration plans and other non-monetary benefits, specifically, the measures adopted for the members of the Identified Staff who are responsible for control functions

The main parameters and reasons for the components of the variable remuneration plans for the Identified Staff have been set out in other sections of this Report.

As already mentioned, in the case of employees who are responsible for control functions, variable remuneration will depend more firmly on the targets related to their functions, thus making them more independent of the business areas they supervise.

Non-financial indicators have a greater weight than financial indicators in the units that are responsible for control functions (Internal Audit, Legal Compliance, Global Accounting & Information Management, General Secretary, Risks and Human Resources). This is in order to make the staff who are responsible for the control functions more independent with respect to the areas supervised.

11.7. Ratios between the fixed and variable remuneration of the Identified Staff

One of the general principles of BBVA’s remuneration policy is that fixed remuneration should constitute a relevant amount of total remuneration.

As regards the Identified Staff, and as set out in article 34.g) of Act 10/2014, its remuneration policy establishes that the variable remuneration for these professionals be limited to the amount of their total fixed remuneration, unless the General Meeting decides to increase this limit to twice the total fixed remuneration, as the aforementioned Act envisages.

The General Meeting held in March 2014 approved that the variable component of the annual remuneration for executive directors, senior executives and certain employees who carry out professional activities that may have a material impact on the Bank’s risk profile, or who are responsible for the control functions, may reach up to 200% of the fixed component of total remuneration, in accordance with the Recommendations Report issued by the Board of Directors of BBVA on January 30, 2014. This resolution was approved by the General Meeting with 97.81% of the votes cast.

Moreover, and as a result of BBVA’s application of the new criteria set out in the European regulation for the identification of the members of the Identified Staff (Regulation 604/2014), which has led to an increase in the number of identified employees in the Group, a new agreement was submitted to the 2015 General Meeting for increasing the group of employees who carry out professional activities that may have a material impact on the Group’s risk profile, or who are responsible for the control functions and to whom the highest level of remuneration applies, so that the maximum variable component of the remuneration for a year may reach up to 200% of the fixed component of the total remuneration of those professionals, in accordance with the Recommendations Report issued for this purpose by the Board of Directors on February 3, 2015 and made available to the shareholders from the date of calling the General Meeting.

Page 158

11.8. Quantitative information on the remuneration of the Identified Staff

[Note 1: The data in the tables below incorporate the best estimates with respect to:

• The remuneration in kind in 2014 (calculated based on the remuneration in kind in 2013)

• The amount of the bonus generated in 2014 in Argentina, Chile, Uruguay and Paraguay

• The pension benefits in some geographical areas such as the U.S., where average data have been used

Note 2: To calculate the economic value of the shares delivered in 2014, the listing price of €8.99/share has been taken, which is the valuation price of the 2014 IED.

Note 3: To calculate the economic value of the outstanding shares, the valuation price of the IED in the year of generation of the variable remuneration has been taken]

Below is a breakdown by area of activity of the total remuneration of the Identified Staff received in 2014, whose variable component will be paid according to the settlement and payment scheme established in section 10.3.2 c. Payment will be complete in 2017, subject to the aforementioned “malus clauses”:

TABLE 68: Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (I)

(Thousand euros)
Remuneration of Identified Staff 2014 (1)		Total remuneration 2014
Commercial Banking (2)			114,532
Investment Banking (3)			48,891
Asset Management (4)			9,301
Other (5)			92,361
Total for the Identified Staff			265,085

⁽¹⁾  Fixed remuneration in 2014 and variable remuneration received in 2014

⁽²⁾  Includes Retail and Commercial Banking Corporate Banking and Insurance Activities

⁽³⁾  Includes trading activities

⁽⁴⁾  Includes Asset Management and Private Banking Activities

⁽⁵⁾  Other activities, Executive and Non-executive Directors and other members of the Management Committee

The following table gives aggregate information on the remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014, broken down by type of employee and senior executive:

Page 159

TABLE 69: Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (II)

(thousand euros)
Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (1)		Executive directors				Non-executive Directors				Other senior executives				Rest of Identified Staff				Total for Identified Staff
Total fixed remuneration paid in 2014 (2)			4,568				3,668				10,067				136,909				155,212
Total variable remuneration paid in 2014 (3)			5,663				0				10,224				93,896				109,873
In cash			2,453				0				4,555				68,420				75,429
In shares or related instruments			3,210				0				5,669				25,565				34,444
In other instruments			0				0				0				0				0
Outstanding deferred variable remuneration (4)			5,872								10,707				32,915				49,495
Consolidated			0				0				0				0				0
Not consolidated			5,872				0				10,707				32,915				49,495
In cash			2,727				0				5,069				16,046				23,843
In shares or related instruments			3,145				0				5,638				16,869				25,652
In other instruments			0				0				0				0				0
Deferred remuneration granted and/or paid in 2014 (5)			2,983				0				4,752				14,608				22,352
Amount of explicit ex post performance adjustment applied in the year on remuneration paid in previous years			0				0				0				0				0
Number of beneficiaries			3				12				13				378				406
Number of employees receiving severance pay			0				0				0				8				8
Total severance pay paid in the year			0				0				0				16,920				16,920
Securitized positions			0								0				0				0

⁽¹⁾  Includes all the positions identified as identified Staff in 2014.

⁽²⁾  Annual gross fixed remuneration as of December 31, 2014.

⁽³⁾  Includes the variable remuneration paid in 2014, both the part for 2013 and the deferred and updated part for previous year (one third of the AVR 11 deferred, one third of the AVR 12 deferred and one third of the ILP 2010-2011 deferred).

⁽⁴⁾  Includes the deferred annual remuneration for previous years pending payment in 2014 (one third of the AVR 2011, one third of the ILP 2010-2011 deferred, two third of the AVR 2012 and deferred percentage of the AVR 2013).

⁽⁵⁾  Includes the deferred variable remuneration for previous years paid in 2014 (one third of the AVR 2012 deferred, one third of the AVR 2011 deferred and one third of the ILP 2010-2011 deferred, as well as their updates.

Of the total compensation paid, the highest paid to a single member amounts to €6,227,255, with a seniority in the company of 21.5 years at the time of departure.

The annual variable remuneration of the members of the Identified Staff for 2014 was determined at the close of that year.

In accordance with the settlement and payment system established for the Identified Staff for the annual variable remuneration in 2014, a percentage of the annual variable remuneration for 2014 will be paid in 2015 (50% in the case of executive directors and members of the Management Committee and 60% in the other cases). The rest will be deferred, to be paid in thirds in 2016, 2017 and 2018. This results in the following amounts:

Page 160

TABLE 70: Remuneration of the Identified Staff in 2014 (III)

(thousand euros)
Remuneration for the Identified Staff corresponding to 2014 (1)		Executive directors				Non-executive Directors				Other senior executives				Rest of Identified Staff				Total for Identified Staff
Amount of variable remuneration corresponding to 2014 received in 2015			2,962				0				6,219				50,839				60,021
In cash			1,481				0				3,110				25,383				29,974
In shares or related instruments			1,481				0				3,110				25,456				30,047
In other instruments			0				0				0				0				0
Amount of variable remuneration corresponding to 2014 that has been deferred (2)			2,962				0				6,219				33,906				43,088
In cash			1,481				0				3,110				16,929				21,520
In shares or related instruments			1,481				0				3,110				16,978				21,568
In other instruments			0				0				0				0				0
Number of beneficiaries			3				12				13				378				406

⁽¹⁾  Includes all the positions identified as Identified in 2014

⁽²⁾  It includes the amount corresponding to the deferred percentage of 2014 RVA.

The number of employees receiving remuneration of 1 million euros or more is as follows:

TABLE 71: Number of people with total remuneration in excess of €1 million in 2014

Number of people with total remuneration of more than 1 million euros in 2014
Total remuneration in 2014 (1)		Number of people
Between 5 million and 6 million euros			1
Between 4.5 million and 5 million euros			0
Between 4 million and 4.5 million euros			0
Between 3.5 million and 4 million euros			1
Between 3 million and 3.5 million euros			2
Between 2.5 million and 3 million euros			3
Between 2 million and 2.5 million euros			2
Between 1.5 million and 2 million euros			5
Between 1 million and 1.5 million euros			28

⁽¹⁾  Sum of the fixed remuneration for 2014 and the variable remuneration generated in 2014

Page 161

12. Subsequent events

The issue of debentures convertible into ordinary BBVA shares was completed on February 10, 2015 for the amount of €1,500 million, putting the phased CET1 ratio at levels of 12.4.

From January 1, 2015 to the date of submission of this report, there have been no events, except for those mentioned earlier, that materially affect the Bank’s earnings or equity situation on the date of drafting of this document.

Page 162

Summary Table Annex

		2014
Type of company according to annex		Consolidated Cost (in millions of euros)
Insurance companies with a stake of more than 10% that are not consolidated at solvency level (Annex I)		3,309
Financial institutions with a stake of more than 10% that are not consolidated at solvency level (Annex I)		112
Rest of companies that are consolidated at accounting level but not at solvency level (Annex II)		413
Rest of companies that are not consolidated at accounting or solvency level (Annex III)		400
TOTAL		4,234
		2014
Type of company according to annex		Consolidated Cost (in millions of euros)
Rest of companies that are not consolidated at accounting level but are consolidated at solvency level (Annex IV)		3,845
TOTAL		3,845

Page 163

Annex I: Insurance companies and financial institutions with a stake of more than 10% that are not consolidated at solvency level

Insurance companies and financial institutions with a stake of more than 10% that are not consolidated at solvency level
Insurance companies with a stake of more than 10% that are not consolidated at solvency level
Insurance stake >10%		Accounting Circular		Solvency Circular		Activity		Consolidated Cost
BBVA SEGUROS COLOMBIA, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			29,809
BBVA SEGUROS DE VIDA COLOMBIA, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			113,353
SEGUROS PROVINCIAL, C.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			47,271
BBVA SEGUROS, S.A., DE SEGUROS Y REASEGUROS		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			1,729,754
BBVA CONSOLIDAR SEGUROS, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			34,872
BBVA BANCOMER SEGUROS SALUD, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			19,228
BBVA RE LIMITED		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			41,931
ESPAÑOLA DE SEGUROS DE CREDITO A LA EXPORTACION CIA. S.A. “CESCE”		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Insurance			0
BBVA SEGUROS DE VIDA, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			57,841
PENSIONES BANCOMER, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			505,868
SEGUROS BANCOMER, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			517,234
BBVA VIDA, S.A.DE SEGUROS Y REASEGUROS		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			145,965
GARANTI EMEKLILIK VE HAYAT AS		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Insurance			65,727
Total									3,308,853
Financial institutions with a stake of more than 10% that are not consolidated at solvency level
Financial institutions stake > 10%		Accounting Circular		Solvency Circular		Activity		Consolidated Cost
COMPAÑIA ESPAÑOLA DE FINANCIACION DEL DESARROLLO S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			16,580
SERVICIOS DE INFRAESTRUCTURAS DE MERCADO OTC, S.A. (IMER-OTC S.A.)		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
BOLSA ELECTRONICA DE VALORES DEL URUGUAY, S.A. (BEVSA)		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
DECEVAL, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
INTERBANKING, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
AUTOMATIC CLEARING HOUSE - ACH 4G		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
TELEFONICA FACTORING ESPAÑA, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			4,611
TRANSBANK, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
SERVICIO DE PAGOS INTERBANCARIOS,S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
ROMBO COMPAÑIA FINANCIERA, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			25,021
TELEFONICA FACTORING MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			806
FINANCEIRA DO COMERCIO EXTERIOR S.A.R.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Financial			32
CONSORCIO INTERNACIONAL DE ASEGURADORES DE CREDITO, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
BRUNARA, SICAV, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			51,765
CAJA DE EMISIONES CON GARANTIA DE ANUALIDADES DEBIDAS POR EL ESTADO, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			21
PROMOTORA BOLSA DE BILBAO, S.A. SDAD.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
CORPORACION SUICHE 7B, C.A		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			592
CAJA VENEZOLANA DE VALORES, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			511
TF PERU SAC		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			809
TELEFONICA FACTORING DO BRASIL		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
COMPASS INVESTMENTS, INC.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Financial			1
COMPASS CUSTODIAL SERVICES, INC.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Financial			1
TELEFONICA FACTORING CHILE, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			355
CABAL URUGUAY, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			192
REDBANC, S.A. (URUGUAY)		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			140
SOCIEDAD ADMINISTRADORA DE FONDOS DE CESANTIA DE CHILE II, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			8,331
ACA, S.A. SOCIEDAD DE VALORES		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			2,070
BANKALARARASI KART MERKEZI A.S.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
CELERIS SERVICIOS FINANCIEROS, S.A		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
FINAVES III NUEVAS INVERSIONES,S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
PROMOCIONES AL DESARROLLO BUMARI, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
SOCIETAT CATALANA D’INVERSIO EN COOPERATIVES, SCR, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
VOLJA PLUS SL		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
TRANS UNION DE MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial			0
Total									111,838

Page 164

Annex II: Rest of companies that are consolidated at accounting level but not at solvency level

Rest of companies that are consolidated at accounting level but not at solvency level
Company		Accounting Circular		Solvency Circular		Activity		Consolidated Cost
BBVA AUTORENTING, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			53,307
BBVA NOMINEES LIMITED		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			0
PRO-SALUD, C.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			0
INVERSIONES P.H.R.4, C.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			6
INVERSIONES ALDAMA, C.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
BBVA CONSULTORIA, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			6,183
BBVA SERVICIOS, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Commercial			1,344
PROMOTORA DE RECURSOS AGRARIOS, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Commercial			108
EL ENCINAR METROPOLITANO, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			7,375
ANIDA PROYECTOS INMOBILIARIOS, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			114,770
ANIDA SERVICIOS INMOBILIARIOS, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			2,039
MULTIASISTENCIA SERVICIOS S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			576
MULTIASISTENCIA OPERADORA S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			33
TEXTIL TEXTURA, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Commercial			0
RESIDENCIAL CUMBRES DE SANTA FE, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
COMPLEMENTOS INNOVACIÓN Y MODA, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Commercial			0
FIDEICOMISO HARES BBVA BANCOMER F/ 47997-2		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
BAHIA SUR RESORT, S.C.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			1,422
ANIDA DESARROLLOS INMOBILIARIOS, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			35,284
SERVICIOS CORPORATIVOS DE SEGUROS, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			3,813
DESARROLLO URBANISTICO DE CHAMARTIN, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			69,518
GOBERNALIA GLOBAL NET, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			4,298
FUTURO FAMILIAR, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			1,367
ESTACION DE AUTOBUSES CHAMARTIN, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			0
URBANIZADORA SANT LLORENC, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			65
MULTIASISTENCIA, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Insurance			25,027
ANIDA GERMANIA IMMOBILIEN ONE, GMBH		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			6,579
BBVA SOLUCIONES AVANZADAS DE ASESORAMIENTO Y GESTION, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			0
IMOBILIARIA DUQUE DE AVILA, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			10,448
SERVICIOS TECNOLOGICOS SINGULARES, S.A.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			2,229
COPROMED S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			25
INMESP DESARROLLADORA, S.A. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			52,272
CONSORCIO DE CASAS MEXICANAS, S.A.P.I. DE C.V.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			3,421
F/403035-9 BBVA HORIZONTES RESIDENCIAL		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			20
F/253863 EL DESEO RESIDENCIAL		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
MADIVA SOLUCIONES, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Services			8,998
CATALONIA GEBIRA, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
HABITATGES INVERVIC, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
HABITATGES JUVIPRO, S.L.		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
UNITARIA GESTION DE PATRIMONIOS INMOBILIARIOS		G - Full consolidation		E-Equity method		Real estate			2,695
Total									413,222

Page 165

Annex III: Rest of companies that are not consolidated at accounting or solvency level

Rest of companies that are not consolidated at accounting or solvency level
Company		Accounting Circular		Solvency Circular		Activity		Consolidated Cost
ALMAGRARIO, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			4,188
SISTARBANC S.R.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial Services			287
FIDEICOMISO F/403112-6 DE ADMINISTRACION DOS LAGOS		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
REDSYS SERVICIOS DE PROCESAMIENTO, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial Services			3,980
CAMARATE GOLF, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			1,635
LAS PEDRAZAS GOLF, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
AUREA, S.A. (CUBA)		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			3,948
PARQUE REFORMA SANTA FE, S.A. de C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
REAL ESTATE DEAL II, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Investment Companies			4,651
I+D MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			16,676
FIDEICOMISO F/402770-2 ALAMAR		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
FIDEICOMISO F 404015-0 BBVA BANCOMER LOMAS III		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
FIDEICOMISO SCOTIABANK INVERLAT SA F100322742		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
FIDEICOMISO F 403853- 5 BBVA BANCOMER SERVICIOS ZIBATA		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
CORPORATIVO VITAMEDICA, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			0
OPERADORA ZIBATA S. DE R.L. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			146
SERVICIOS VITAMEDICA, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			70
FERROMOVIL 3000, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			4,400
FERROMOVIL 9000, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			3,381
LA ESMERALDA DESARROLLOS, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
VITAMEDICA S.A DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Insurance			0
FIDEICOMISO F/70191-2 LOMAS DE ANGELOPOLIS II		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			-9,207
IRB RIESGO OPERACIONAL, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			529
JARDINES DEL RUBIN, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			1,470
COMPAÑIA MEXICANA DE PROCESAMIENTO, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			6,441
ECUALITY E-COMMERCE QUALITY, S.A.S.P.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Commercial			0
ADQUIRA MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Commercial			2,026
ADQUIRA ESPAÑA, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Commercial			2,509
TELEFONICA FACTORING COLOMBIA, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial Services			306
GUP GESTION UNIFICADA DE PROYECTOS, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			0
METROVACESA, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			233,054
P.R.ALBIRSA, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			96
OPERADORA DOS LAGOS S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			97
OPERADORA ALAMAR SA DE CV		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			11
OPERADORA MIRASIERRA, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			10,678
TENEDORA DE VEHICULOS, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			409
SERVIRED SOCIEDAD ESPAÑOLA DE MEDIOS DE PAGO, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Financial Services			8,353
OPERADORA HITO URBANO, S.A. DE C.V		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			89
SOLIUM MEXICO, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			770
ALTITUDE SOFTWARE SGPS, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			7,785
SOLIUM OPERADORA, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			51
FIDEICOMISO 1729 INVEX ENAJENACION DE CARTERA		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Special-purpose Real-estate Companies			69,570
VITAMEDICA ADMINISTRADORA, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			2,033
CANCUN SUN & GOLF COUNTRY CLUB, S.A.P.I. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
BATEC MOBILITY, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			401
FIDEICOMISO SCOTIABANK INVERLAT S.A. F100322908		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
ARRAHONA GARRAF, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
AXIACOM-CRI, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
BALMA HABITAT, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
DOBIMUS, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
FRIGEL, S.L		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			331
GARRAF MEDITERRANIA, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
HABITATGES CIMIPRO, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
HABITATGES FINVER, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
HABITATGES LLULL, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
NOVA LLAR SANT JOAN, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
NUCLI, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
PROBIS AIGUAVIVA, S.L. (NO ACTIVITY)		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
PROMOCIONS CAN CATA, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
RESIDENCIAL PEDRALBES-CARRERAS, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
RESIDENCIAL SARRIA-BONANOVA, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			258
SBD CEAR, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			1
SBD CREIXENT, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
SOLARVOLAR, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
VIC CONVENT, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			141
OSONA CIPSA, S.L.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			0
MOTORACTIVE MULTISERVICES SRL		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			73
GARANTI FILO YONETIM HIZMETLERI A.S.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			5,895
GARANTI FILO SIGORTA ARACILIK HIZMETLERI A.S.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Insurance			0
GARANTI KULTUR AS		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			85
TRIFOI REAL ESTATE SRL		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Real estate			17
NAVIERA ATTILA, AIE		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			0
NAVIERA ELECTRA, AIE		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			0
NAVIERA CABO ESTAY, AIE		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			0
SEGURIDAD Y PROTECCION BANCARIAS, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			844
SERVICIOS ELECTRONICOS GLOBALES, S.A. DE C.V.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			5,285
SERVICIOS ON LINE PARA USUARIOS MULTIPLES, S.A. (SOLIUM)		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Services			6,691
TUBOS REUNIDOS, S.A.		E-Equity method		E-Equity method		Industrial			0
Total									400,454

Page 166

Annex IV: Rest of companies that are not consolidated at accounting level but are consolidated at solvency level
Rest of companies that are not consolidated at accounting level but are consolidated at solvency level
Company		Accounting Circular		Solvency Circular		Activity		Consolidated Cost
INVERSIONES PLATCO, C.A.		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			11,112
ALTURA MARKETS, SOCIEDAD DE VALORES, S.A.		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Securities Firms			18,016
ASOCIACION TECNICA CAJAS DE AHORROS, A.I.E. (ATCA, AIE)		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Services			2,146
TURKIYE GARANTI BANKASI A.S		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Banking			3,614,729
GARANTIBANK INTERNATIONAL NV		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Banking			92,577
GARANTI BANK SA		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Banking			0
G NETHERLANDS BV		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Portfolio			17,218
RALFI IFN SA		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
DOMENIA CREDIT IFN SA		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
MOTORACTIVE IFN SA		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
GARANTI HOLDING BV		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Portfolio			0
GARANTI BANK MOSCOW		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Banking			2,460
GARANTI FINANSAL KIRALAMA A.S.		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			48,402
GARANTI FACTORING HIZMETLERI AS		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			4,501
GARANTI YATIRIM MENKUL KIYMETLER AS		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			177
GARANTI PORTFOY YONETIMI AS		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			2,013
GARANTI BILISIM TEKNOLOJISI VE TIC. TAS		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Services			2,978
SAFEKEEPING CUSTODY COMPANY B.V.		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
GARANTI DIVERSIFIED PAYMENT RIGHTS FINANCE COMPANY		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			3
RPV COMPANY		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
GARANTI ODEME SISTEMLERI A.S.(GOSAS)		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			1,500
GARANTI HIZMET YONETIMI A.S		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			516
GARANTI KONUT FINANSMANI DANISMANLIK HIZMETLERI AS (GARANTI MORTGAGE)		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Services			204
GOLDEN CLOVER STICHTING CUSTODY		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
STICHTING UNITED CUSTODIAN		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Financial Services			0
STICHTING SAFEKEEPING		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Portfolio			0
PSA FINANCE ARGENTINA COMPAÑIA FINANCIERA, S.A.		E-Equity method		P-Proportional consolidation		Banking			26,067
Total									3,844,619

Note: The zero balances correspond to companies whose holding value is equal to zero, as well as companies that are not consolidated.

Page 167

SIGNATURE

Pursuant to the requirements of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, the registrant has duly caused this report to be signed on its behalf by the undersigned, thereunto duly authorized.

				Banco Bilbao Vizcaya Argentaria, S.A.
Date: March 16, 2015				By:		/s/ Eduardo Ávila Zaragoza
				Name: Eduardo Ávila Zaragoza
				Title: Head of Global Supervisory Relations